MediaWiki - User contributions [en]

User:Ranjithsiji

2026-05-22T20:39:07Z

Ranjithsiji: update documentation

== Info ==
[[File:Ranjith Siji Presents Introduction to Mediawiki APIs - Wiki Conference India - CGC - Mohali 2016-08-06 7714.JPG|right|250px|Ranjithsiji]]
Name : Ranjith Siji
* Place: Kochi, Kerala, India
* Work: Web Application Building
* Blog: [http://ibcomputing.com IB Computing]
* Wiki Tech : [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji Wikitech]
* En Wiki Page : [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji English Wiki Page]
* Ml Wiki Page : [http://ml.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji Malayalam Wiki Page]
* Interest: [[PHP]],[[Mysql]],[[Postgresql]],[[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]],[[HTML]],[[CSS]],[[Ajax]],[[Ruby]],[[Rails]],[[Ubuntu]],[[Fedora]]
* I am a PHP/Python/Nodejs Programmer. Using Mysql/Postgresql as database.

==Navbox for mobile devices==
* Refer [[User:Lady G2016]] and [[Module:User:Lady G2016/NavboxMobile]]
I have created a prototype Lua module which implements Template:Navbox for mobile devices.
: See https://ml.wikipedia.org/wiki/Module:NavboxMobile
: Css https://ml.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mediawiki:Mobile.css
: Some tweaks in Desktop is also needed Implement : https://ml.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mediawiki:Common.css
===Problems===
* Not working with Dark mode
* In mobile screens it is hidden under the last heading of an article (So by default it is not showing on mobile screens). Need a fix

User:Ranjithsiji

2024-12-16T16:10:10Z

Ranjithsiji:

User:Ranjithsiji

2024-12-16T16:09:52Z

Ranjithsiji: add pic

== Info ==
[[File:Ranjith Siji Presents Introduction to Mediawiki APIs - Wiki Conference India - CGC - Mohali 2016-08-06 7714.JPG|Ranjithsiji]]
Name : Ranjith Siji

Place: Kochi, Kerala, India

Work: [[Web Designing]] and [[Web Application]] Building

Blog: [http://ibcomputing.com IB Computing]

Wiki Tech : [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji Wikitech]

En Wiki Page : [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji English Wiki Page]

Ml Wiki Page : [http://ml.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji Malayalam Wiki Page]

Interest: [[PHP]],[[Mysql]],[[Postgresql]],[[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]],[[HTML]],[[CSS]],[[Ajax]],[[Ruby]],[[Rails]],[[Ubuntu]],[[Fedora]]

I am a PHP Programmer. Using Mysql as database.

User:Ranjithsiji

2024-12-16T16:08:17Z

Ranjithsiji: fix web

== Info ==

Name : Ranjith Siji

Place: Kochi, Kerala, India

Work: [[Web Designing]] and [[Web Application]] Building

Blog: [http://ibcomputing.com IB Computing]

Wiki Tech : [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji Wikitech]

En Wiki Page : [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji English Wiki Page]

Ml Wiki Page : [http://ml.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Ranjithsiji Malayalam Wiki Page]

Interest: [[PHP]],[[Mysql]],[[Postgresql]],[[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]],[[HTML]],[[CSS]],[[Ajax]],[[Ruby]],[[Rails]],[[Ubuntu]],[[Fedora]]

I am a PHP Programmer. Using Mysql as database.

User:Ranjithsiji/Sandbox

2024-12-16T16:04:35Z

Ranjithsiji:

create chart
{{#chart:1993 Canadian federal election/pie.chart}}

Extension talk:Chart/Project

2024-12-09T11:09:29Z

Ranjithsiji: /* Meta */ Reply

[[File:Welcome in 21 languages.svg|240px|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|link=]]
{{WMF present
|1=SGrabarczuk (WMF)|timezone_1=UTC+1/2|lang_1=pl, en, fr|photo_1=Szymon Grabarczuk2.jpg
}}
{{Archive box}}

== How would you like to be notified about project updates? ==

I think I'm going to create a newsletter similar to [[Newsletter:Web team's projects]] which would send an [[Notifications|Echo notification]] with a link to the updates page. It seems to be simpler, less spammy, global by default (since Echo is global), and thus better than mass message on user talk pages. So let me know if you strongly prefer to get mass message on your user talk page anyway. I need to pick one method, can't promise both. (Posting messages about major milestones on village pumps is a different topic, we will be posting those too.) Thanks! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:30, 3 July 2024 (UTC)

:Echo notification is good to me. Thanks [[User:Pamputt|Pamputt]] ([[User talk:Pamputt|talk]]) 20:57, 7 July 2024 (UTC)

== Data source ==

Requiring data to be in the Commons Data namespace is a quite effective way to ensure Charts will <em>not</em> be used. I don’t have figures, but I’m pretty sure many, if not most, uses of Graph don’t use the Data namespace, but rather inline data, template or module subpages, or Wikidata (via SPARQL or via the Wikibase Scribunto interface). If the only data source would be inline, all of these except for SPARQL could be used (including the Commons Data namespace, via modules using its own Scribunto interface); if the only data source is the Commons Data namespace, anything but Data namespace pages becomes unusable, and the project will be a failure. —[[User:Tacsipacsi|Tacsipacsi]] ([[User talk:Tacsipacsi|talk]]) 09:25, 6 July 2024 (UTC)

:That's the same concern I have. If I had to create a graph with the data namespace on Commons as middle man, I'd simply not bother. That's too much effort. I'd rather see it take in-line data first, also considering I have never seen a graph using the data namespace "in the wild" before. [[User:DarkShadowTNT|DarkShadowTNT]] ([[User talk:DarkShadowTNT|talk]]) 21:48, 10 July 2024 (UTC)
::@[[User:Tacsipacsi|Tacsipacsi]] @[[User:DarkShadowTNT|DarkShadowTNT]] this feedback has been noted and we're in the process of analyzing how different data sources were used in Graphs. For the purposes of our upcoming prototype, we will pursue the Commons tabular data approach. While sourcing data from MediaWiki APIs or Wikidata Query Service is not the focus for this initial project, we want to ensure the extension is designed in a way that those sources can be supported in the future without requiring any Lua code. [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 19:23, 26 July 2024 (UTC)
:::The problem is exactly that: not having a purpose. When the project fails, no one won't blame it on a poor scope, we will read how "editors are not using it". [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 21:04, 26 July 2024 (UTC)
:::I can only repeat myself: this predestines this project to fail. You can spend a lot of money and work hours on this project, but if you build something people don’t need, it’s just throwing out that money and time. No problem, I’ve mostly given up the hope anyway that we’ll have a usable graph implementation ever again. —[[User:Tacsipacsi|Tacsipacsi]] ([[User talk:Tacsipacsi|talk]]) 09:38, 27 July 2024 (UTC)
:::Re-reading your reply once again, I noticed that there may be a misunderstanding. I didn’t ask for the ability to get data from the APIs or Query Service directly. I asked for the ability to specify data <strong>inline</strong>, where the parser tag is placed. That inline data could come wherever the wiki editor wants. This would make the graphs at least <em>not less</em> powerful than the current CSS-based hacks. —[[User:Tacsipacsi|Tacsipacsi]] ([[User talk:Tacsipacsi|talk]]) 09:43, 27 July 2024 (UTC)
::::Inline is very relevant, indeed. But having data from the Wikidata Query Service is a must, because up-to-date data can be found there for a lot of things. Anyway, the team decided to make something sub-optimal from the start, so it can be justified on the low usage not improving it in the future. [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 10:23, 27 July 2024 (UTC)
:::::Many (though not all) WDQS queries can be replaced by data queried via the Wikibase Lua interface – and data queried via the Wikibase Lua interface can be specified inline. Lua code may not be as expressive as SPARQL, but it gives you more freedom (e.g. you can add a summarizing table below the graph), and has built-in change propagation, which also means it’s easier on the servers (data isn’t re-queried from Wikidata on every page view) while it’s still guaranteed that if data does change, it propagates within a reasonable time. (WDQS is at its limits, so I’d avoid using it wherever a reasonable alternative exists.) And being able to specify data inline allows not only Wikidata data to be displayed, but also data stored in templates or actually inline in the article text. —[[User:Tacsipacsi|Tacsipacsi]] ([[User talk:Tacsipacsi|talk]]) 16:41, 28 July 2024 (UTC)
::::::Thanks for the clarification @[[User:Tacsipacsi|Tacsipacsi]], I hear you on the flexibility that inlining data provides. We are trying to avoid depending on Lua and Templates this time around which is why I was suggesting a path to being able to use WDQS or APIs directly in the future instead. We're going to think about this a bit more and will keep you updated. Do you have specific examples of the types of charts you'd want to be able to create? That would be really helpful. I'd like to explore options that don't make you lose hope in the project! We're open to adjusting our approach as we learn more :) [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 00:36, 7 August 2024 (UTC)
:I also agree. It may seem harsh to say that a chart without data-points given in the transclusion would be a deal breaker, but that is just the reality of it. There should be an option to give data-points like <nowiki>{{#chart:format=1993 Canadian federal elections.chart|x=1,2,3|y=1,2,3}}</nowiki>. Having the data-points in a json is not simpler. I can see how a programmer would think, "I and my programmer friends know json, so that should be an easy way of doing it", but it is not. A layperson does not know much at all about json. [[User:Snævar|Snævar]] ([[User talk:Snævar|talk]]) 12:38, 3 August 2024 (UTC)
::I agree the tabular data pages are not the easiest to work with right now. Making that experience better is something we're considering. Like I mentioned in the thread above, we're going to think about this a bit more and will keep you updated. It would be helpful for us if you could share some examples of the types of charts you'd like to create. Thank you! [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 00:45, 7 August 2024 (UTC)
:::It should be pretty easy to see examples of use by just accessing the tracking category for the graph extension. A few of the charts I created over the years:
:::[[en:Nuclear_power#Fukushima_accident]]
:::[[en:Growth_of_photovoltaics#Solar_overcapacity_(2009%E2%80%932013)]]
:::[[en:Growth_of_photovoltaics#Growth_by_year]]
:::[[en:High-speed_rail_in_Italy#History]]
:::Many more have since been deleted because of the broken extension [[User:Ita140188|Ita140188]] ([[User talk:Ita140188|talk]]) 01:52, 30 August 2024 (UTC)
: Not much to say other than +1. This decision pretty much ensures Chart extension will be useless in many circumstances it gets used, or harder to track vandalism in (since most Commons data pages are not actually protected, even high-use ones). If at least a way to create charts from Lua isn’t provided, this pretty much ensures that any usage of the new extension would be limited to a few cases where people might hack around the unnecessarily rigid extension requirements.<br>I also think it would’ve been much more courteous to announce these plans properly, so people who might be interested in Graph extension replacement would know that this extension was shot in the foot like this by its developers. [[user:stjn|stjn]]<sup>[[:w:ru:user:stjn|[ru]]]</sup> 11:31, 16 October 2024 (UTC)
:Just wanted to echo the concern with not having more ways to source data for graphs. I understand that convenience for developers the present setup affords by giving them total visibility into usage of the feature, and potentially allowing for easily mass-editing the graph data to accommodate breaking changes in the JSON grammar. But I feel that requirements of users need to be kept first.
:Some of the priorities of this project seem rather ill-conceived. {{tq|we want to ensure the extension is designed in a way that those sources can be supported in the future without requiring any Lua code.}} @[[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] But why? Especially when that comes at the cost of making the extension highly inflexible for the short term? It may well be the case that you are planning to add more ways in the "future" – but WMF products have a long history of being developed for a limited time and then effectively abandoned, so that "future" may never come.
:Being able to provide graph data inline opens up the ability to templatize them – so that multiple places which use the same graph data with minor variations can specify just those variations as parameters to a template. But for some reason, use of templates seems to have been considered undesirable without any reasons being provided. [[User:SD0001|SD0001]] ([[User talk:SD0001|talk]]) 12:19, 30 November 2024 (UTC)
::So my worries about being unable to use it on my wiki (to which I got no reply [https://mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_talk:Chart/Project?markasread=&markasreadwiki=mediawikiwiki#c-Rasputin1493-20240830163800-Sj-20240830163700 here]) has been confirmed with this comment. I'll be unable to use it in the same way, by simply calling for data parameters that will fill in a chart according to it by the help of a template.
::That would be beyond disappointing. [[User:Rasputin1493|Rasputin 93]] ([[User talk:Rasputin1493|talk]]) 13:43, 30 November 2024 (UTC)
*Agreeing with all others in this thread. I didn't even realize the fact that this means data can't be templated before the above comment. If I'm understanding it right, just to create a simple bar graph, you will have to actually create two extra pages (the json chart definition and the data itself), which is a very convoluted process that none bar the most dedicated editors will go through, when previously it could all be edited from one page. The only advantage to this approach is it is usable on all languages/wikis, which is good, but not necessary in many cases. There should be the option for both. There also seems to be no updates about how, whether and when existing graphs, missing totally for 1.5 years now, can show ''anything'' and make users not have to resort to the source code or web archive. It seems like a herculean effort would be required to create a json and data page for every graph on English Wikipedia. This entire process seems misguided to me: I feel like it should have been, first, create something that requires little adjustment or bots to fit within the current system so that existing graphs can be restored, ''then'' begin creating this new system. I was previously hesistant to begin my own personal project to create SVGs for articles, especially high view articles, such as [[w:en:World War II|en:World War II]] or [[w:en:2020 United States presidential election|en:2020 United States presidential election]], given the redundancy concerns, but I think I am now going to look into this, given I have no confidence this project will be completed any time in the near future for existing graphs. [[User:MarkiPoli|MarkiPoli]] ([[User talk:MarkiPoli|talk]]) 14:05, 30 November 2024 (UTC)

== Dream usage: mapping plane destinations ==

[[File:Philippine Airlines Route Map International.png|thumb|A similar example of ideal Chart extension capabilities]]

It is not a top priority but you did ask "''If you have ideas on what criteria we should consider"''...

Every English Wikipedia article has an "Airlines and destinations" section packed with useful data: [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Owen_Roberts_International_Airport#Airlines_and_destinations Example].

Will the new Chart extension be able to map this?

Vega can do something like it, see [https://vega.github.io/vega/tutorials/airports/ Mapping Airport Connections Tutorial]. [[User:Commander Keane|Commander Keane]] ([[User talk:Commander Keane|talk]]) 23:57, 8 July 2024 (UTC)

:Thanks for the suggestion @[[User:Commander Keane|Commander Keane]]. While this specific example might not be one of the first chart types available, it should be possible within the architecture we are envisioning. [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 19:10, 26 July 2024 (UTC)

== Usage on private wiki ==

Hello, I've been following the evolution of this ever since I've added the Graph extension to my wiki only to discover it has been shut down few weeks prior and therefore rendered unusable.
I'm now lost on whether the future Chart extension will be usable on a private wiki in a simple way. I've read here and there about data to be stored in Commons, but I'm unsure if this is compatible with the way I envision potential charts to work, since I have regularly updating data stemming from templates. Meaning I change some value in an article's infobox, which will therefore change another value on a different article through templates using the DynamicPageList3 extension and this would be reflected on a chart (or multiple across the wiki). It's a very dependent automation that updates my entire wiki by just changing one value on one page. Currently, I use the same workflow with some very basic pie chart replacement that some user here wrote, but it's just a temporary solution.
I don't know if my use-case is too niché or not, hence my question here so I can finally rest my thoughts about this once I get an answer. [[User:Rasputin1493|Rasputin 93]] ([[User talk:Rasputin1493|talk]]) 02:17, 30 August 2024 (UTC)
* [[User:Rasputin1493|Rasputin1493]] how was it rendered unusable? Why can you not still choose to have it on your private wiki... [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 16:25, 30 August 2024 (UTC)
*:The Graph extension just won't display any graphs whatsoever. [[User:Rasputin1493|Rasputin 93]] ([[User talk:Rasputin1493|talk]]) 16:29, 30 August 2024 (UTC)
*:: Maybe I don't know what you mean by 'private'. A private wiki on Wikimedia servers? Or on your own home server? [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 16:37, 30 August 2024 (UTC)
*:::I manage these wikis, they are hosted elsewhere.
*:::https://rammwiki.net
*:::https://linkinpedia.com [[User:Rasputin1493|Rasputin 93]] ([[User talk:Rasputin1493|talk]]) 16:38, 30 August 2024 (UTC)

== We should have a complete-ish table of Graphs and Charts ==

Ita mentioned above that some of his charts made over the years have been deleted since the extension was shut down; that may be a common experience for people who were devoted and expert curators of the genre. I would find a complete list of past graphs/charts to be more useful than the anecdata resulting from surveys and discussions. and it would let us run an archival script to render and save snapshots of them.

This involves:
# a query across the full wiki dump as of the day Graphs were shut down, for Graph usage specifically
# a query across the current wiki dump, for any of a range of graphs and charts rendered in various ways (images w/ a caption describing the graph, easytimelines, pie charts, &c)

[[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]]: is that possible on your end, as part of the background research? [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 16:37, 30 August 2024 (UTC)

:I don't have this list readily available to share right now, but it is something we're going to look into again as part of preparing to support editors with migrating from existing graphs usage. From what I remember, getting the archival data (from the day graphs were turned off) was more of a challenge. I will get back to you on this, to inform your request below as well. Getting a current dump (or at least at the time we're ready to migrate) should be much easier. [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 14:06, 24 September 2024 (UTC)

== Archiving old Graphs ==

Since noone is monitoring the old Graphs pages, posting this here:
* I'd like to make snapshots of all Graphs from last April. Ideally with the output of a query of that database dump (above) to know how many to expect :)
* [[User:Tgr|Tgr]] I think you mentioned that you had a test server set up that could render this? but that you didn't think we would need it if the extension was fixed soon. Since it's not being fixed, and the Chart: does not have a timeline for identifying and restoring large swaths of old graphs, let's just make the snapshots. Do you still have a server that could be used for this purpose? (If not, can we do this in the wmf cloud / does it need to be on our own server somewhere else?)
Cheers, [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 16:41, 30 August 2024 (UTC)

:I don't have one but AFAICS it should be simple to set one up on Wikimedia Cloud. [[User:Tgr|Tgr]] ([[User talk:Tgr|talk]]) 22:48, 30 August 2024 (UTC)
:I know this was a while ago, but I would strongly agree with doing this. There seems to be no real timeline about when the old graphs will be available, so the snapshots should be made and for lets say all articles with more than X amount of views per day they should be bot replaced, with, obviously, the numerical data either kept and commented out, or deleted in the article and saved to a master server somewhere, ideally both, ready to be re-uploaded to commons as table files (if that's the only way it is able to be done in the future). This shouldn't be impossibly hard for simple charts such as bar, line and pie. Sure, if you're bot replacing, probably not all can be checked for being correct and not malformed, but even a malformed chart is better than a totally non existent one, as it is currently. [[User:MarkiPoli|MarkiPoli]] ([[User talk:MarkiPoli|talk]]) 14:16, 30 November 2024 (UTC)

{{collapse|title=Sidenote|
<small>(Here is how it is covered in the current project plan:

: ''Once it's possible to create charts that can replace graph uses, we will work with volunteers to start converting them so that readers can start to see them again... For graphs that cannot be converted, it may be more beneficial to either find an alternative tool to recreate the graph, convert the graph to a static image, or remove the graph altogether.''

This sort of open-ended timeline, with multiple possible options and uncertainty about what will even be possible, does not work well with distributed community planning. It is much better to take a simple, completable, uniform step, such as making static images, and divide & conquer that.</small>
}}

== Labels on hover or tap-click ==

[[File:Graph label on hover by Nux.png|thumb|Graph label example]]
Seems like there are no labels for data (tooltips shown on hover and tap). Is this planned or should I file a request for that? Labels should contain something like x-y values for simple charts. Maybe configurable for other types of charts ([https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Module:Piechart#Labels_and_Legend see some examples of labels on my css piechart module]).

I can see on beta that there a currently some click regions on the graph near data points, but they seem to do nothing. Not sure if the click-regions are a placeholder for future function or just something that came out of the library being used? [[User:Nux|Nux]] ([[User talk:Nux|talk]]) 12:32, 4 September 2024 (UTC)

:The way we're rendering the charts right now on the server don't add the type of hover tooltip you're describing. The library we're using to render ''does'' support this though, among other interactive features we're hoping can be added in later. Feel free to file a task -- at least investigating how we can add support for this is something we plan to do. [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 14:10, 24 September 2024 (UTC)
::{{ping|CCiufo-WMF}} Hi. The addition of tooltips is necessary for the readability of graphs, especially line graphs, particularly when there are several lines. And especially when there is a lot of data. A graph should not just give an idea of how the data are changing, but should also provide direct access to the data. I see that the task could be planned, but is there a deadline?[[User:Roland45|Roland45]] ([[User talk:Roland45|talk]]) 14:40, 26 October 2024 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Roland45|Roland45]] We are working on adding interactive features like hover tooltips right now, and I hope it will be available on the beta cluster soon. I can ping back here once it is. [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 15:21, 1 November 2024 (UTC)

== Will .chart edition be limited? ==

I have seen that the translations are hard-coded inside the .chart at (Beta) Commons. I don't think this is the best approach, as it will have lot of redundant translations, but, anyway... will any user have the ability to edit any given .chart page or will it be limited to certain kind of users? If the later is true, is there a workaround for translations? [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 16:42, 4 September 2024 (UTC)

:We're planning to keep charts editing open to everyone, especially to support the translation edits you're describing. We're open to suggestions on how we can improve the editing workflow for multilingual support. I agree the hardcoded translation in the chart definitions could get a bit messy, but it's the best option available to us right now to get things fully working. [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 14:17, 24 September 2024 (UTC)

== Stacked lines ==

For [https://commons.wikimedia.beta.wmflabs.org/wiki/Data:Company_X_GHG_emission.chart this chart] i would like to use stacked lines. It [https://echarts.apache.org/handbook/en/how-to/chart-types/line/stacked-line looks like] it could be possible.

[[User:Ainali|Ainali]] ([[User talk:Ainali|talk]]) 08:22, 11 October 2024 (UTC)

:Hey @[[User:Ainali|Ainali]], yes this is possible, I've updated your example to use the "area" chart type, which is stacked by default. Let me know what you think! [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 20:43, 15 October 2024 (UTC)
::That is excellent, thanks! [[User:Ainali|Ainali]] ([[User talk:Ainali|talk]]) 09:41, 17 October 2024 (UTC)

== Can't find any September update for this project ==

{{Ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} Is there any later update for this project than the one from August 30, 2024, i.e. almost seven weeks ago?

If so, where can I find it? Isn't [[Extension:Chart/Project/Updates]] the correct place to look for updates?

If not, when is the next update/newsletter planned to be available?

Where is the current time plan for this project, stating what and when for the planned project deliverables, published? [[User:Larske|Larske]] ([[User talk:Larske|talk]]) 10:33, 15 October 2024 (UTC)

:Hey@[[User:Larske|Larske]], these are all excellent questions! We are working on a project update. Normally I'd say it'd be published this week. Given the circumstances (Monday was a holiday for many of us, and I'm taking Friday off) I'm not 100% sure, but I believe this week is doable. There will be a new section on the /Updates page, I will send a notification via the newsletter, and the update will also be mentioned in Tech News. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 14:25, 15 October 2024 (UTC)

== Possibility to have timeline support ==

The old EasyTimeline have several problems including not rendered in SVG, require font set up for non-Latin script. It would be good to have the functionality in Chart. -- [[Special:Contributions/122.100.88.150|122.100.88.150]] 06:47, 26 October 2024 (UTC)

:Hey there, replacing EasyTimeline isn't in scope for this project, but it may be a potential future enhancement (see [[phab:T137291#10059538|phab:T137291]]). [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 15:15, 1 November 2024 (UTC)

== Letting you know :) ==

"Let us know if you'd like your wiki to be one of the first to receive the new extension." I would like it enabled on Swedish Wikipedia, please. [[User:Ainali|Ainali]] ([[User talk:Ainali|talk]]) 09:08, 26 October 2024 (UTC)

:@[[User:Ainali|Ainali]] Thanks for letting us know! In the meantime feel free to continue testing in the beta cluster, and then on test wiki once we've deployed there. [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 15:16, 1 November 2024 (UTC)

== Fr-Wikipedia application ==
I can confirm what was said above, namely that accessing json is not as easy as all that, especially when there is a huge amount of data to transpose. You need suitable tools, which not everyone has. However, this is the route I had envisaged in 2020 to internationalise country demography data, by creating tables in Commons such as [https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/Data:Population_FR_Q204388.tab this one]. A module written in lua would then have processed the data. But the project failed. In fact, the main advantage of having the tables in Commons is precisely the possibility for any wikipedia to use the data.

That's why I'm applying to have the tool developed on the FR-Wiki as a test.[[User:Roland45|Roland45]] ([[User talk:Roland45|talk]]) 14:53, 26 October 2024 (UTC)

:@[[User:Roland45|Roland45]] thank you for the historical context, and I'm glad to hear you'd like to see Charts on FR-wiki. Being able to easily reuse Charts in any wiki is exactly why we chose Commons as the central store. And yes I agree, there can be more done to make it easier to work with the Data namespace. [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 15:19, 1 November 2024 (UTC)

== it.wiki ==

I would like to point out that Italian Wikipedia is one of the projects in the forefront with testing features like Charts, being one of the group 1 wikis regarding MediaWiki releases. we will be very interested to get the feature (even in beta) on our project. [[User:Valepert|Valepert]] ([[User talk:Valepert|talk]]) 11:14, 3 November 2024 (UTC)

:@[[User:Valepert|Valepert]] good to know, thanks! [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 17:15, 7 November 2024 (UTC)

== wuu.wiki ==

It will be nice if [[:wuu:|wuu.wiki]] is involved in first sites to receive the new extension. [[User:Lt2818|Lt2818]] ([[User talk:Lt2818|talk]]) 14:27, 4 November 2024 (UTC)

:Thanks for letting us know @[[User:Lt2818|Lt2818]] [[User:CCiufo-WMF|CCiufo-WMF]] ([[User talk:CCiufo-WMF|talk]]) 17:15, 7 November 2024 (UTC)

== Rationale behind Data: on commons ==

I'm excited for charts being back on pilot wikis! I get that it's kind of late now, but I wonder why Commons was chosen as the source for data instead of Wikidata, the existing wiki for collating data? [[User:Aaron Liu|Aaron Liu]] ([[User talk:Aaron Liu|talk]]) 20:14, 29 November 2024 (UTC)
: It's a fair question why we don't turn on the Data: namespace on Wikidata. But for transclusions that look like media, we currently store all of the associated structured data on Commons. We definitely have two major different use cases for tabular data: structured metadata and chart data. Both have been stored on Commons since [[Structured Data on Commons|SDC]], so changing that would be a more abstract discussion not specific to this extension :) [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 15:54, 30 November 2024 (UTC)

== Meta ==
Hoping to see this on Meta-wiki as well. [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 15:56, 30 November 2024 (UTC)

:Can make dashboard based on statistics in Meta. A big leap in impact study and participation in events. [[User:Ranjithsiji|Ranjithsiji]] ([[User talk:Ranjithsiji|talk]]) 11:09, 9 December 2024 (UTC)

Translation suggestions: Topic-based & Community-defined lists/Collaborators

2024-10-26T15:24:53Z

Ranjithsiji: add group

<languages/>
<translate>

'''Add your user name below and the campaign you help organise''' to sign up to work with us in testing the <tvar name=1>{{ll|Translation suggestions: Topic-based & Community-defined lists}}</tvar> feature as a pilot Wikipedia Campaign organiser.

== User names and campaigns == 
</translate>
* Example [[User:UOzurumba (WMF)|UOzurumba (WMF)]] ([[User talk:UOzurumba (WMF)|talk]]) 16:21, 6 September 2024 (UTC), [[metawiki:WikiGap_Nigeria_Online_Challenge|WikiGap Nigeria campaign]]
* [[metawiki:User:Arianit|Arianit]] from the [[metawiki:Wikimedians of Albanian Language User Group|Wikimedians of Albanian Language User Group]] - we participate in several international campaigns but also want to suggest Top 1,000 or Top 2,000 vital articles to Wikipedians from our community and planning to work with several University language study programs who sometimes have specific preferences on topics.
* [[User:SCP-2000|SCP-2000]] ([[User talk:SCP-2000|talk]]) 17:23, 5 October 2024 (UTC), Contributor on Chinese Wikipedia.
* [[User:DaSupremo|DaSupremo]] ([[User talk:DaSupremo|talk]]) 23:26, 5 October 2024 (UTC), Translator from English to Ghanaian Pidgin
* [https://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/WikiProject_Women%27s_Health WikiProject Women's Health] has identified the [https://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Wikiproject_Women%27s_Health/Vital_articles vital articles] related to women's health. We have lists of essential articles (n=10), level 1 articles (n=100), level 2 articles (n=99), and level 3 articles (n=92). We would be very interested in working on translating these articles, although no ongoing translation campaigns are running now. --[[User:Netha Hussain|Netha Hussain]] ([[User talk:Netha Hussain|talk]]) 11:17, 22 October 2024 (UTC)
* [[User:Iwuala Lucy|Iwuala Lucy]] ([[User talk:Iwuala Lucy|talk]])… I coordinate various projects that revolves around translating contents from the English Wikipedia to the Igbo Wikipedia
* [[User:Ranjithsiji|Ranjithsiji]] ([[User talk:Ranjithsiji|talk]]) from [[:meta:Wikimedians of Kerala|Wikimedians of Kerala User Group]] - I organize various edit-a-thons in Malayalam Wiki. I am local organizer of Wiki Asian Month in Malayalam Wikipedia from 2015.

Translation suggestions: Topic-based & Community-defined lists/Collaborators

2024-10-26T15:22:45Z

Ranjithsiji:

<languages/>
<translate>

'''Add your user name below and the campaign you help organise''' to sign up to work with us in testing the <tvar name=1>{{ll|Translation suggestions: Topic-based & Community-defined lists}}</tvar> feature as a pilot Wikipedia Campaign organiser.

== User names and campaigns == 
</translate>
* Example [[User:UOzurumba (WMF)|UOzurumba (WMF)]] ([[User talk:UOzurumba (WMF)|talk]]) 16:21, 6 September 2024 (UTC), [[metawiki:WikiGap_Nigeria_Online_Challenge|WikiGap Nigeria campaign]]
* [[metawiki:User:Arianit|Arianit]] from the [[metawiki:Wikimedians of Albanian Language User Group|Wikimedians of Albanian Language User Group]] - we participate in several international campaigns but also want to suggest Top 1,000 or Top 2,000 vital articles to Wikipedians from our community and planning to work with several University language study programs who sometimes have specific preferences on topics.
* [[User:SCP-2000|SCP-2000]] ([[User talk:SCP-2000|talk]]) 17:23, 5 October 2024 (UTC), Contributor on Chinese Wikipedia.
* [[User:DaSupremo|DaSupremo]] ([[User talk:DaSupremo|talk]]) 23:26, 5 October 2024 (UTC), Translator from English to Ghanaian Pidgin
* [https://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/WikiProject_Women%27s_Health WikiProject Women's Health] has identified the [https://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Wikiproject_Women%27s_Health/Vital_articles vital articles] related to women's health. We have lists of essential articles (n=10), level 1 articles (n=100), level 2 articles (n=99), and level 3 articles (n=92). We would be very interested in working on translating these articles, although no ongoing translation campaigns are running now. --[[User:Netha Hussain|Netha Hussain]] ([[User talk:Netha Hussain|talk]]) 11:17, 22 October 2024 (UTC)
* [[User:Iwuala Lucy|Iwuala Lucy]] ([[User talk:Iwuala Lucy|talk]])… I coordinate various projects that revolves around translating contents from the English Wikipedia to the Igbo Wikipedia
* [[User:Ranjithsiji|Ranjithsiji]] ([[User talk:Ranjithsiji|talk]]) - I organize various edit-a-thons in Malayalam Wiki. I am local organizer of Wiki Asian Month in Malayalam Wikipedia from 2015.

Reading/Web/Accessibility for reading/Reporting/ml.wikipedia.org

2024-07-29T16:02:14Z

Ranjithsiji: /* ❓നിക്കോള ടെസ്‌ല dark mode error */ Reply

Key: The following emojis in the title mean someone has looked at the feedback and worked out what to do with it.
{| class="wikitable"
|+Caption
!Icon
!Meaning
|-
|📢
|User is providing general feedback and it should be reviewed by designer/PM. If the template is legible in dark mode (just bright!) you can also consider it feedback and use this emoji. For popular templates, please consider adding a comment on the talk page when adding this emoji.
|-
|❓
|Report was unclear and we don't know what to do with it.
|-
|✅
|This has been fixed or reported on wiki.
|-
|🐛
|This is tracked in a bug or a talk page comment (please use the Tracked template).
|}

== ❓[[:ml:നിക്കോള_ടെസ്‌ല|നിക്കോള ടെസ്‌ല]] dark mode error ==


'''Issue Description'''
In ml.wikipedia.org Dark mode is not giving white color to paragraph tag. So the text is in black and cannot read it. Hopefully some problem with @media screen { .mw-body p
: {{re|Ranjithsiji}} Hello, could you please explain the issue you are facing in detail and provide the screenshot if possible (you may upload the screenshot to imgbb.com)? Thanks. [[User:SCP-2000|SCP-2000]] ([[User talk:SCP-2000|talk]]) 13:59, 29 July 2024 (UTC)

:https://ibb.co/C1PcYtY this is the screenshot link. the issue is the text is black. [[User:Ranjithsiji|Ranjithsiji]] ([[User talk:Ranjithsiji|talk]]) 15:09, 29 July 2024 (UTC)
::@[[User:Ranjithsiji|Ranjithsiji]]: [https://ml.wikipedia.org/wiki/നിക്കോള_ടെസ്‌ല?vectornightmode=1&minervanightmode=1 I cannot re-produce this problem when logged out]. It seems to be the problem with your custom css/js or gadegt. Have you tried to disable gadegt and custom css/js? [[User:SCP-2000|SCP-2000]] ([[User talk:SCP-2000|talk]]) 15:35, 29 July 2024 (UTC)
:::OK. That was a problem with my css. Sorry my bad. [[User:Ranjithsiji|Ranjithsiji]] ([[User talk:Ranjithsiji|talk]]) 16:02, 29 July 2024 (UTC)

Reading/Web/Accessibility for reading/Reporting/ml.wikipedia.org

2024-07-29T15:09:07Z

Ranjithsiji: /* ❓നിക്കോള ടെസ്‌ല dark mode error */ Reply

Reading/Web/Accessibility for reading/Reporting/ml.wikipedia.org

2024-07-13T16:12:38Z

Ranjithsiji: /* നിക്കോള ടെസ്‌ല dark mode error */ new section

== [https://ml.wikipedia.org/wiki/നിക്കോള_ടെസ്‌ല നിക്കോള ടെസ്‌ല] dark mode error ==


'''Issue Description'''
In ml.wikipedia.org Dark mode is not giving white color to paragraph tag. So the text is in black and cannot read it. Hopefully some problem with @media screen { .mw-body p

Talk:Wikimedia Hackathon 2024

2024-04-03T04:08:33Z

Ranjithsiji: /* Estonia visa from india. Travel insurance not accepting */ new section

== Mark Your Calendars: Wikimedia Hackathon 2024 in Tallinn, Estonia, from May 3rd - 5th 2024! 🎉 ==

Hi Everyone,
On behalf of the Wikimedia Foundation's Hackathon Organizing team, I am thrilled to share the exciting news that the 2024 Wikimedia Hackathon is scheduled to unfold in the captivating city of [[:en:Tallinn|Tallinn, Estonia]], from May 3rd - 5th 2024!
The Wikimedia Hackathon is an annual event, uniting the global technical community in a dynamic gathering focused on connection, innovation, and building really cool projects. At this event, technical contributors hailing from all corners of the globe converge with a shared mission: to enhance the technological infrastructure and software that underpins and empowers Wikimedia projects. For this exceptional 2024 edition, the Wikimedia Foundation is joining forces with [[metawiki:Wikimedia_Eesti|WMEE, the official local chapter of the Wikimedia Foundation in Estonia]], to bring you an unforgettable experience.
The theme for this edition aligns with last year's, emphasizing the gathering of individuals who have a track record of contributing to the technical aspects of Wikimedia projects. We're looking for those who are versed in navigating the technical ecosystem and are adept at working autonomously or collaborating effectively on projects.

While the majority of our event will unfold onsite, we're excited to share that certain parts of the program will be broadcasted online, ensuring accessibility to a wider audience. We warmly encourage local communities to host pre-hackathon events or meetups. In the coming months, [[Wikimedia Hackathon 2024|these pages]] will be your go-to resource for comprehensive details on attendance procedures, venue specifics, travel recommendations, accommodation options, and scholarship opportunities. Stay tuned!
The next milestone on our journey is just around the corner. Registration and scholarship applications are set to open Monday November 27th (see [[Wikimedia Hackathon 2024|timeline]]). Be sure to keep an eye on the talk page, mediawiki page and your inbox for consistent updates.
Should you have any inquiries or wish to get in touch with the coordination team, please don't hesitate to reach out to us at hackathon@wikimedia.org, or share your thoughts on the talk page of the hackathon.
We are really looking forward to welcoming you again at the Hackathon, and we hope that you are also excited to join and hack together! [[User:OOnifade-WMF|OOnifade-WMF]] ([[User talk:OOnifade-WMF|talk]]) 17:29, 22 November 2023 (UTC)

== Health and safety policy ==

Looking forward to this event! As part of making this onsite event a [[Policy:Friendly_space_policy|Friendly Space]], will you create a health and safety policy that covers masking policies and other covid-19 related health procedures? Even though the Foundation lifted its [https://diff.wikimedia.org/2022/03/29/announcement-of-the-removal-of-the-covid-travel-policy/ covid travel policy], it is still recommended that event organizers follow these best practices and guidelines to ensure the safety of participants: https://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Grants:Risk_assessment_during_COVID-19/In-person_gatherings_checklist.

Having a clearly-communicated health and safety policy will help make this event welcoming to everyone. Thank you! [[User:TBurmeister (WMF)|TBurmeister (WMF)]] ([[User talk:TBurmeister (WMF)|talk]]) 17:15, 27 November 2023 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:TBurmeister (WMF)|TBurmeister (WMF)]]
:Thank you for bringing this to our attention. We are committed to prioritizing the health and safety of all participants at the event. We will create a comprehensive health and safety policy, adhering to industry best practices to ensure a secure environment for everyone involved. [[User:OOnifade-WMF|OOnifade-WMF]] ([[User talk:OOnifade-WMF|talk]]) 12:30, 12 February 2024 (UTC)

== Travel arrangements ==

is there travel arrangements for wikipmedias from Nigeria [[User:Nkiru Odihekandu|Nkiru Odihekandu]] ([[User talk:Nkiru Odihekandu|talk]]) 09:20, 31 January 2024 (UTC)

:Hello! We are finalizing the list of scholarships that will be provided to a limited amount of folks to help with travel arrangements, including anyone from Nigeria that might be on that final list. However, for those not selected for a scholarship to the 2024 Hackathon, we can't provide travel arrangements to anyone else, apologies. [[User:DTankersley (WMF)|DTankersley (WMF)]] ([[User talk:DTankersley (WMF)|talk]]) 15:18, 31 January 2024 (UTC)

== How do I apply my visa from Nigeria to Estonia ==

how do I apply for visa from Nigeria to Estonia [[User:Nkiru Odihekandu|Nkiru Odihekandu]] ([[User talk:Nkiru Odihekandu|talk]]) 13:05, 2 February 2024 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:Nkiru Odihekandu|Nkiru Odihekandu]]
:Kindly use this [https://service2.diplo.de/rktermin/extern/appointment_showDay.do?locationCode=accr&realmId=278&categoryId=449&dateStr=12.04.2024 link] to select your country and embassy [[User:Dnshitobu|Dnshitobu]] ([[User talk:Dnshitobu|talk]]) 16:17, 2 February 2024 (UTC)
:Hi @[[User:Nkiru Odihekandu|Nkiru Odihekandu]]Here are some additional information:
:https://www.vm.ee/en/consular-visa-and-travel-information/visa-information/countries-where-estonia-represented-another#nigeria-abuja
:For more information concerning visa applications in Nigeria, please consult TLS: https://visas-be.tlscontact.com/visa/ng
:Embassy of Belgium: https://nigeria.diplomatie.belgium.be/en/travel-to-belgium [[User:OOnifade-WMF|OOnifade-WMF]] ([[User talk:OOnifade-WMF|talk]]) 12:34, 12 February 2024 (UTC)

== Request for travel documents ASAP ==

Hi there!

Thank you for the scholarship. I currently have my passport with the German Embassy, and when I got this scholarship, I wrote to them asking if I would be able to submit the travel documents for the Hackathon for an extended visa since there is no available slot from now until the hackathon event except in April, and they accepted. They are requesting that I send the invitation letter, flight itinerary, and hotel booking ASAP so that they can review it and make their decision. Of course, the scholarship email said these documents will be sent to us by February 16, which will be very timely for my case. '''I am writing to plead with the organizers to see how fast they could help me with those documents, at least before February 8, 2024, to be able to send them over to the embassy so that they could just work on both for me before I pick my passport scheduled for February 12, 2024.'''

I look forward to hearing from you soonest. [[User:Dnshitobu|Dnshitobu]] ([[User talk:Dnshitobu|talk]]) 16:32, 2 February 2024 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:Dnshitobu|Dnshitobu]]
:Kindly share your request via email to hackathon@wikimedia.org
:Thanks [[User:OOnifade-WMF|OOnifade-WMF]] ([[User talk:OOnifade-WMF|talk]]) 12:27, 12 February 2024 (UTC)

== Here’s what you need to know ==

Hi there,

As we get ready for the 2024 Wikimedia Hackathon in Tallinn, Estonia, we want to give you some important updates about the event. The main goal of the Hackathon is to bring together all the creative technical minds in Wikimedia, build a strong community, and, of course, work on some amazing projects.

This year's Hackathon will be group sessions in an [[:en:Unconference|unconference]] format. It will be driven by you, the participants, in real time! Hence, most sessions are proposed at - or just before - the actual hackathon event. By consolidating sessions into unconference blocks, we're getting back to the hackathon’s roots - '''hacking on projects!'''

'''What does this mean for Sessions/Workshops/Meetups:'''

* You are welcome to propose sessions via the [[phab:project/board/6865/|2024 Hackathon Phabricator Workboard]]!. The schedule will include dedicated blocks for unconference sessions.

'''What should you do NOW:'''

* Add your projects to the [[phab:project/board/6865/|2024 Hackathon Phabricator Board]] (Under hacking projects). If you have an idea for a project, create [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/edit/form/1/?projects=Wikimedia-Hackathon-2024 a new task] in Phabricator. If you’d be working on an existing project you'd like help with, please add the [[phab:tag/wikimedia-hackathon-2024/|Wikimedia-Hackathon-2024 project tag]] to the existing ticket! Check out the [[Phabricator/Help|Phabricator Help page]] if you have any issues.
* Engage in pre-event activities: add yourself to the [[Wikimedia Hackathon 2024/Connect#Participants list|public participants list]], participate in the [[Wikimedia Hackathon 2024/Connect#Engage in Conversations|Hackathon discussion channels]].
* Prepare to pitch your project idea during the Opening Ceremony and share outcomes in a Final Event Showcase.

'''Do you need accommodation?'''

* If you are still looking for accommodation or want to stay at the Hilton Tallinn, use this [https://eventsathilton.com/show/65dd95a437dddf2b42880138 link] for a discounted price on your stay.

The MediaWiki page has been updated with all the essential details to help you plan for this year's event. Please take the time to visit and thoroughly read through it. If you have any questions or suggestions, don't hesitate to reach out to the organizers at [mailto:hackathon@wikimedia.org hackathon@wikimedia.org]- We're here to help!

== CD ==

VDO [[Special:Contributions/2001:FB1:138:5BDE:E40B:9B88:399A:AA62|2001:FB1:138:5BDE:E40B:9B88:399A:AA62]] 08:25, 2 April 2024 (UTC)

== TwoCD ==

TWO VDO CD [[Special:Contributions/2001:FB1:138:5BDE:E40B:9B88:399A:AA62|2001:FB1:138:5BDE:E40B:9B88:399A:AA62]] 08:26, 2 April 2024 (UTC)

== Estonia visa from india. Travel insurance not accepting ==

I am applying visa for estonia from india. They are not accepting berkly travel insurance. How to get another insurance. [[User:Ranjithsiji|Ranjithsiji]] ([[User talk:Ranjithsiji|talk]]) 04:08, 3 April 2024 (UTC)

User:Ranjithsiji/Sandbox

2023-01-06T10:56:19Z

Ranjithsiji: test summary

article content

Topic:W3yima3iio4zfjx1

2021-02-23T03:48:32Z

Ranjithsiji (talk | contribs) commented on "Visual Editor save content as parent.location="/login.htm" (I have installed Mediawiki 1.35.1 on php 7.4, nginx 1.19. Loaded visual editor but when loads the page content is missing and when its sa...)

Extension talk:VisualEditor/2021

2021-02-23T03:48:32Z

Ranjithsiji: /* Visual Editor save content as parent.location="/login.htm */ New section

{{flow imported revision}}
Please note that the Wikimedia Foundation does not provide support for installing VisualEditor on third-party wikis. However, if you have a question we may try to help.
== Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server (HTTP 404) when using short links. ==

{| class="wikitable"
!Product
!Version
|-
|[https://www.mediawiki.org/ MediaWiki]
|1.35.1
|-
|[https://php.net/ PHP]
|7.3.25 (cgi-fcgi)
|-
|[https://www.mysql.com/ MySQL]
|5.7.26-29-log
|-
|[http://site.icu-project.org/ ICU]
|63.2
|}
Shared hosting, Siteground

Apache/Nginx Compatible Server

.htaccess file has been created to assist in link shortening.

I'm having some trouble getting VisualEditor (herein referred to as VE) to work. It worked perfectly out the box when I installed MediaWiki and activated it, but the second I tried to shorten links (hide the index.php?title=main_page), it broke. Here are the steps I took:

#Installed MediaWiki 1.35.1.
#Created .htaccess file to activate rewrite capabilities. (VE worked at this point)
#Added " <code>$wgScriptExtension = ".php";</code> <code>$wgArticlePath = "/$1";</code> "

When I added that code to shorten the link from "<nowiki>https://example.net/index.php?title=Main_Page</nowiki>" to "<nowiki>https://example.net/Main_Page</nowiki>", I suddenly got the 404 error. Removing those lines of code results in the extension working as expected.

I've added my two cents to [[phab:T270376|this bug report]], as it's pretty close to if not exactly the issue I'm going for. Only difference is my .htaccess file doesn't harm the functionality of VE. There are many bug reports on phabricator with the same issues. I've tried the steps outlined in VE's troubleshooting section on the extension page for 404 errors, but nothing seems to work. I don't think I have root access. Any ideas what's going on? [[User:Orribu|Orribu]] ([[User talk:Orribu|talk]]) 09:47, 5 January 2021 (UTC)
:As an update, I can't create new pages using VE either; I get the same error when I go to save changes. [[User:Orribu|Orribu]] ([[User talk:Orribu|talk]]) 01:18, 10 January 2021 (UTC)

== Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server: http-request-error ==

Getting the error mentioned in the Topic when trying to edit anything on mediawiki.

Upgraded Wiki from 1.32 to 1.35 (sequential upgrade). This is a private Wiki.

Followed the steps as per the Visualeditor extension page. I have read other users thread who are having similar issues.

Following is the setup in localsettings.php

<code>wfLoadExtension( 'VisualEditor' );</code>

<code>$wgDefaultUserOptions['visualeditor-enable'] = 1;</code>

<code>$wgDefaultUserOptions['visualeditor-editor'] = "visualeditor";</code>

<code>$wgVisualEditorParsoidAutoConfig = true;</code>

<nowiki>#</nowiki>Added this based on reading a few threads as VE requests as an anonymus user

<code>if (in_array($_SERVER['REMOTE_ADDR'],</code>

<code> [</code>

<code> $_SERVER['SERVER_ADDR'],</code>

<code> '127.0.0.1',</code>

<code> 'localhost',</code>

<code> '<public IP>',</code>

<code> '<IPv6>',</code>

<code> '::1']</code>

<code>)) {</code>

<code> $wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = true;</code>

<code> $wgGroupPermissions['*']['write'] = true;</code>

<code> $wgGroupPermissions['*']['writeapi'] = true;</code>

<code>}</code>

Appreciate if any one could help me with this [[User:Wikiusr23|Wikiusr23]] ([[User talk:Wikiusr23|talk]]) 19:45, 7 January 2021 (UTC)

== Error with IIS and Windows-Authentication ==

{| class="wikitable"
!Product
!Version
|-
|Mediawiki
|1.35.1
|-
|PHP
|8.0
|-
|MariaDB
|10.5
|-
|IIS
|10
|}

I use the LDAP Plugins (LDAP Stack) on an IIS to work with an AD-Environment.

It works and the users automatically get logged in.

Unfortunately i cannot launch Visual Editor when i have "Anonymous Authentication" deactivated in IIS.

If i enable anonymous authentication in IIS the VE starts working as expected again - but this leads to users not getting logged in automatically.

It throws an 401 Error as soon as I click on "Edit", which I think is caused by the IIS already denying the connection for the anonymous "Visual Editor" User-Agent.

I have seen workarounds for Apache, but unfortunately i could not find mixed authentication configs for iis. Is there any workaround possible? For example "creating" a windows service account for the VE which is used so i can use VE and automatic logins?

Thanks in advance! [[Special:Contributions/2A02:810B:1040:712C:E01A:5E1A:6335:E030|2A02:810B:1040:712C:E01A:5E1A:6335:E030]] ([[User talk:2A02:810B:1040:712C:E01A:5E1A:6335:E030|talk]]) 15:28, 13 January 2021 (UTC)

== How to change the copyright notice shown in the "save changes" dialog ==

'''When I press the "save changes" button after making changes in the Visual Editor, then the following notice pops up:'''

Please note that all contributions to EkklesiaWiki may be edited, altered, or removed by other contributors. If you do not want your writing to be edited mercilessly, then do not submit it here.

You are also promising us that you wrote this yourself, or copied it from a public domain or similar free resource (see ... for details). Do not submit copyrighted work without permission!

'''Q: How / Where can I change this copyright notice?''' [[User:Frank on MW|Frank on MW]] ([[User talk:Frank on MW|talk]]) 13:40, 20 January 2021 (UTC)

== Save page on edit dont close "save changes" dialog ==

On creating page - all ok.

If i am try to save changes when editing page - no errors in Chrome dev console, no error in Parsoid logs.

api.php XHR request return 200 OK status. But... Dialog does not closing and page not reload.

Excepted: page roloaded after saving [[Special:Contributions/176.37.172.54|176.37.172.54]] ([[User talk:176.37.172.54|talk]]) 13:44, 22 January 2021 (UTC)
:My wiki version: 1.35
:Parsoid ver: 0.11.0
:if click "Save changes" when no any changes - all ok. Page reloaded as excepted.
:If i am add any char(make any changes on page) - save button does not close dialog and not relolad page...
:Response from api.php
:{
:"visualeditoredit": {
:"categorieshtml": "<nowiki><div id=\"catlinks\" class=\"catlinks catlinks-allhidden\" data-mw=\"interface\"></div></nowiki>",
:"content": "<nowiki><div class=\"mw-parser-output\"><p>sdfdf <b>dfasfaffff asd as</b></nowiki>\n<nowiki></p></nowiki>\n\n\n\n\n<nowiki></div></nowiki>",
:"contentSub": "",
:"displayTitleHtml": "Test2",
:"isRedirect": "",
:"jsconfigvars": [
:],
:"lastModified": {
:"date": "22 января 2021",
:"time": "14:27"
:},
:"modules": [
:],
:"newrevid": 98,
:"result": "success",
:"watched": true,
:"watchlistexpiry": null
:},
:"warnings": [
:{
:"code": "unrecognizedparams",
:"html": "Нераспознанный параметр: vetags",
:"module": "main"
:}
:]
:} [[Special:Contributions/62.244.50.171|62.244.50.171]] ([[User talk:62.244.50.171|talk]]) 14:31, 22 January 2021 (UTC)
:Skin: vector
:i am trying parsoid 0.8 - has same issue.
:Looks like some issue in VE js code. [[Special:Contributions/62.244.50.171|62.244.50.171]] ([[User talk:62.244.50.171|talk]]) 14:42, 22 January 2021 (UTC)
:In skin MinervaNeue - all working like expected [[Special:Contributions/62.244.50.171|62.244.50.171]] ([[User talk:62.244.50.171|talk]]) 14:44, 22 January 2021 (UTC)
:Screen recording with issue: youtu .be/-9CXOyctjFE [[User:AssadaKiev|AssadaKiev]] ([[User talk:AssadaKiev|talk]]) 15:33, 22 January 2021 (UTC)

== (Curl error: 60) SSL peer certificate or SSH remote key was not OK (MediaWiki 1.35 + VisualEditor + Windows/IIS) ==

{| class="wikitable"
!Product
!Version
|-
|Mediawiki
|1.35.0
|-
|PHP
|7.3.24
|-
|MariaDB
|10.5.8
|-
|IIS
|10
|-
|OS
|Windows Server 2019
|}
'''Symptoms:'''

New installation of private MediaWiki 1.35 with Visual Editor. IIS configured to use Windows Authentication (to enable authentication with Windows AD). MW works as excepted, launching VE causes Curl error 60.

VisualEditor documentation states that with MediaWiki 1.35, you should not need to download anything to get VE working, private wiki may need some configuration but otherwise VE should work out of the box.

Many hours (days) and lots of research later I can say, that getting VE work with MediaWiki 1.35 on Windows environment wasn’t such an easy task. I found lots of suggestions how to get VE work after “''Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server: (Curl error: 60) SSL peer certificate or SSH remote key was not OK''”, but none of them worked for me.

'''Workaround:'''

This is my solution (quite simple, actually), hope this helps someone to get things working without days of work and banging head to the wall.

1. Install MediaWiki 1.35 with extensions of your choice.

2. Make sure that everything is working like you want (except that stubborn VisualEditor that gives you Curl error 60)

3. Export CA-certificate and add reference to it in php.ini -conf '''(*'''

4. Modify authentication settings of rest.php -file in IIS '''(**'''

5. Add following lines to LocalSettings.php

<code>if($_SERVER['REMOTE_ADDR'] == 'your_server_ip_address'){</code>

<code>$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = true;</code>

<code>$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = true;</code>

<code>}</code>

6. Make iisreset

'''(*''' If I get it right, the Curl 60 is generated when you click on modify in MediaWiki, which leads to connection attempt to VE through PHP that can't verify the server certificate in use. To fix this error you need to export the CA-certificate and tell the PHP where it is found:

1. Open mmc → Add/Remove Snap-in → Certificates → Computer account

2. In certificates -console navigate to Trusted Root Certification Authorities → Certificates

3. Select your Root CA → Export → Base-64 encoded X.509 (.CER) (this is equivalent to .pem -certificate format) → Save to the wiki root -folder (same place where is your LocalSettings.php) with name “cacert.cer”

4. Go to your PHP install folder and find php.ini → find line '';curl.cainfo =''

5. Remove ; and add absolute path to your exported cacert.cer -file, example: ''<code>curl.cainfo = “c:\WIKI\cacert.cer”</code>''

Now the curl 60 should disappear, you can verify that by changing the IIS authentication settings to Anonymous Authentication and authenticating with log in form.

'''(**''' SSO wont work if you have Anonymous Authentication enabled in IIS and VE wont work if it is disabled. This is a problem if you use something else than username/password to authenticate users (you know what I mean if you have smart cards in use).

You can tackle the authentication problem by setting the Anonymous Authentication only to the rest.php -file (found in you wiki root) and everywhere else you can use Windows Authentication and keep the Anonymous Authentication disabled:

1. Navigate to your %windir%\system32\inetsrv\config directory and modify applicationHost.config

2. Search <location path=”your_wiki_site”> … </location> section and add a new section below it:

<code><location path=”your_wiki_site/rest.php”></code>

<code><system.webServer></code>

<code><security></code>

<code><authentication></code>

<code><anonymousAuthentication enabled=”true” /></code>

<code></authentication></code>

<code></security></code>

<code></system.webServer></code>

<code></location></code>

3. Save your changes to the config file and make an iisreset.

Now you should have working MediaWiki with Visual Editor. [[User:Configmaster|Configmaster]] ([[User talk:Configmaster|talk]]) 10:45, 29 January 2021 (UTC)

== Pasting images ==

Hi, I am writing an article, I would like to paste a picture .... Oh no dialog box appears, I have to confirm the license (1), click Send (2), enter a name (3), enter a description (4), press Use this image (5) , press Insert (6). That's six unnecessary clicks. When using other editors, pasting images is instant. I think everyone around the world would like these six clicks removed [[User:Karoljas96|Karoljas96]] ([[User talk:Karoljas96|talk]]) 07:24, 30 January 2021 (UTC)
:There is a necessary tension between the drive to make contributing easier and ensuring that users appropriately consent to the consequences of their actions. For Wikimedia uses, I seriously doubt we will want to reduce these steps; some consider it too easy as-is.
:If you think a third party site using VisualEditor would value swinging that workflow closer to the former than that latter, please file a Phabricator task for having a setting adjusting this. [[User:Jdforrester (WMF)|Jdforrester (WMF)]] ([[User talk:Jdforrester (WMF)|talk]]) 17:09, 30 January 2021 (UTC)

== Save dialog does not closing after page save ==

Save dialog does not closing after page save in Vector skin. If using MinervaNeue with VE - saving dialog works fine.

After clicking "Save" button in dialog - article saved successfully but this dialog does not closing. No js console errors or warnings. [[Special:Contributions/18.235.19.247|18.235.19.247]] ([[User talk:18.235.19.247|talk]]) 12:50, 8 February 2021 (UTC)
:Also if switch editor from wikitext to VisualEditor - save dialog works as expect. This dialog broken only on edit(save NEW page - works fine). [[Special:Contributions/18.235.19.247|18.235.19.247]] ([[User talk:18.235.19.247|talk]]) 12:53, 8 February 2021 (UTC)

== Not Working on 1.35 ==
{{Archive top|result=Softaculous fault|status=resolved}}

(also posted on https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T265043)

I can view and edit pages, but i get error on clicking Save:

"Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server (HTTP 403)"

Visual Editor is able to read and edit pages. Just cannot save. Here's my config:

<code>// VISUAL EDITOR</code>

<code>wfLoadExtension( 'VisualEditor' );</code>

<code>$wgGroupPermissions['*']['writeapi'] = true;</code>

<code>$wgRevokePermissions['*']['writeapi'] = false;</code>

<code>$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = true;</code>

<code>$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = true;</code>

Here are some other parts of my LocalSettings.php which might be relevant. I shared relevant links. Protection is rather complicated, and i struggled with it at the time i set up this wiki (3 yrs ago):
# SUPPOSED TO REMOVE THE "PROTECT" TAB FOR THEIR NAMESPACES
# <nowiki>https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection</nowiki>
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_PORTAL] =
$wgNamespaceProtection['NS_FORM'] =
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_PROJECT] =
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_HELP] =
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_CATEGORY] =array( 'editprotected' );
/* <nowiki>https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:User_rights#List_of_permissions</nowiki>
The above statement means: Users and groups who have 'editprotected' permission shall have write-access to the Form namespace. editprotected makes sense here, cuz:
- Only admins have editprotected by default, and i want to target admins.
- "wgNamespaceProtection" is all about, well, editing something that's protected :)
- saves me the trouble of creating a new protection and applying to admins.
<nowiki>https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Topic:Ua5fqyzhagx3iso8&action=history</nowiki>
<nowiki>https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Topic:Ua5fqyzhagx3iso8&topic_showPostId=ua7het8puwsmpt4y#flow-post-ua7het8puwsmpt4y</nowiki>
*/

## FLOW & ECHO
wfLoadExtension( 'Flow' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Echo' );
$wgNamespaceContentModels[NS_TALK] = 'flow-board'; # MAIN TALK <nowiki>https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_default_namespaces#MediaWiki_Core</nowiki>
$wgNamespaceContentModels[NS_PROJECT_TALK] = 'flow-board';
$wgNamespaceContentModels[NS_HELP_TALK] = 'flow-board';
$wgNamespaceContentModels[NS_CATEGORY_TALK] = 'flow-board';
$wgNamespaceContentModels[107] = 'flow-board';
$wgNamespaceContentModels[NS_DRAFT_TALK] = 'flow-board';
$wgNamespaceContentModels[NS_PORTAL_TALK] = 'flow-board';

## APPROVED REVS
wfLoadExtension( 'ApprovedRevs' );
$egApprovedRevsAutomaticApprovals = true; # allow auto-approval of admin edits.
$egApprovedRevsEnabledNamespaces[] = NS_DRAFT;
$egApprovedRevsSelfOwnedNamespaces[] = NS_USER ;

## MODERATION
wfLoadExtension( 'Moderation' );
$wgModerationTimeToOverrideRejection = 31556952;
$wgModerationNotificationEnable = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['sysop']['moderation'] = true; # Allow sysops to use Special:Moderation
$wgGroupPermissions['sysop']['skip-moderation'] = true; # Allow sysops to skip moderation
$wgGroupPermissions['automoderated']['skip-move-moderation'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['sysop']['skip-move-moderation'] = true;
$wgAutoConfirmCount = 10;
$wgGroupPermissions['autoconfirmed']['skip-move-moderation'] = false;

$wgWhitelistReadRegexp =
['/Portal:/', '/ /', '/Draft:/', '/Template:/', '/Category:/', '/Topic:/',
'/MediaWiki:Common.css/', '/MediaWiki:TopicTags.css/', '/Special:AllPages/', '/Special:RecentChanges/', '/Special:RequestAccount/'
]; [[User:Johnywhy|Johnywhy]] ([[User talk:Johnywhy|talk]]) 23:46, 8 February 2021 (UTC)
:Solved. This was apparently Softaculous fault.
:VisualEditor works in a manual MW install, no problem, with this config:
:<code>wfLoadExtension( 'VisualEditor' );</code>
:<code>$wgGroupPermissions['*']['writeapi'] = true;</code>
:<code>$wgRevokePermissions['*']['writeapi'] = false;</code>
:<code>$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = true;</code>
:<code>$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = true;</code>
:<code># By default, VisualEditor is only enabled for the namespaces "Main", "User", "File" and "Category"</code>
:<code>$wgVisualEditorAvailableNamespaces = [</code>
:<code> "Portal" => true,</code>
:<code> "Draft" => true,</code>
:<code> NS_PORTAL_TALK => true,</code>
:<code> NS_DRAFT_TALK => true</code>
:<code> ];</code> [[User:Johnywhy|Johnywhy]] ([[User talk:Johnywhy|talk]]) 23:52, 11 February 2021 (UTC)
{{Archive bottom}}

== Categories not being handled as expected ==

I have a private wiki I'm currently testing and getting ready for migration from 1.31 and deployment. The new wiki runs 1.35.1 on RHEL8 with PHP 7.4.6 and MariaDB 10.3.27. Thus far, we've gotten VE working as we configured it, but have encountered an issue. When attempting to add a page to an existing category, the category does not consistently appear when entered using the Categories dialog via the menu selection (i.e., it is sometimes red). Saving the category assignment as part of the page associates it properly with the category (same when using the wikitext editor). When editing the page, the category previously assigned appears in the Category dialog as "index.php?title=Category:Testing" (Category:Testing was the assigned category).

Any idea what might be going on here?

Thanks! [[User:DHillBCA|DHillBCA]] ([[User talk:DHillBCA|talk]]) 21:35, 11 February 2021 (UTC)

== VisualEditor strange behavior (unregistered inputs, double line breaks, disappearing characters...) ==

Hi all,

On my wiki (using mediawiki 1.35.1), VisualEditor (0.1.2) behaves very strangely and I can't figure out what might be causing it.

Here's a gif showing this, with the on-screen keyboard on just for the purposes of seeing my inputs: vgy.me/u/DlMgW6

Partial list of some weird things I've seen:

- Can't enter text if there's nothing written yet (must use the toolbar to add a formatted string and then you're able to add to it).

- Can't input a line break if the cursor is at the end of the line (must add a random character, add the line break before it, then remove the character).

- Line breaks inconsistently add one or two lines.

- If adding several line breaks with no text, it's impossible to then navigate to one in the middle; arrows keys make the cursor jump to the next line with text.

- Sometimes inputs are simply not registered, or the characters get added to the end of the line regardless of where the cursor is.

- Adding line breaks sometimes makes random characters appear (presumably the same characters who did not appear when trying to input them earlier)

- etc.

Does anyone have any idea what might be causing this, and/or how to fix it? Thanks. [[User:Acccent|Acccent]] ([[User talk:Acccent|talk]]) 18:12, 16 February 2021 (UTC)

== VisualEditor, article with a lot of Math tags at MediaWiki 1.35 > Timeout ==

Hello, few months ago, I've switched our private wiki to version 1.35. Yesterday I found, when I'm trying to edit a relatively large page, that contains a lot of math tags, I'm receiving the message:

<code>Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server: (curl error: 28) Timeout was reached</code>

On small pages everything is fine. In order to solve this problem, I've set <code>$wgHTTPTimeout = 60;</code> (the default value is 25 seconds). In this way I can edit a little bigger pages but the problem remains! Bigger values (like 720) doesn't change anything. The only change is in the error message, it changes to:

<code>The server did not respond within the expected time.</code>

I've tried to change almost all Timeout variables that I found at MediaWiki's documentation with no success, including <code>$wgMathLaTeXMLTimeout</code>, <code>$wgMathMathMLTimeout</code> and <code>$wgMathConcurrentReqs</code>.

Then I've copy an example content here within my user's page: [[User:Spas.Z.Spasov/math-test]]. You can see VE works as it is expected here.

So, I think the problem is that, because by default [[Extension:Math]] uses the MediaWiki's Mathoid server, but external users like us have low priority and the responses are slow. Setup own Mathoid server is too complicated task, due to lack of up-to-date documentation. But I think the problem is due to something hard codded in VisualEditor, because with the previous version, that uses Parsoid.js, despite of the long time for the response everything was fine.

Could you please guide me what I could tray to change in the VE's code in order to solve this issue? [[User:Spas.Z.Spasov|Spas.Z.Spasov]] ([[User talk:Spas.Z.Spasov|talk]]) 19:30, 16 February 2021 (UTC)

== Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server (HTTP 404) ==

So I noticed many people have been struggling with this issue for the past few months.
My case is a little unusual...
Visual Editor loads everywhere..
Edit: Actually only if the user subpage does not exist.
However it is not able to save or preview any subpage under User:Admin. Editing pages in the main namespace works as usual.
I've found that this page /api.php?action=visualeditor&format=json&paction=parse&page=User:Admin/Subpage
returns fine if Subpage does not exist, but returns "Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server (HTTP 404)" when the page exists (created using source editor).
I also get the same error when trying to switch to source editor within any User:Admin subpage from Visual Editor.

A little about my setup:
Mediawiki 1.35.1 (I used 1.35 before, upgraded today after I found these issues hoping it would solve the issues).
Short URLs using apache's FallbackResource ($wgArticlePath = "/view/$1";).
Vanilla config except for:
*Hcaptcha (skip for User and Sysop, triggers for all pages)
*Luasandbox config
*Sysops may delete log entries
*External link target _blank
I do **not** have "wfLoadExtension( 'Parsoid', ...)" in my config.
I do **not** have "$wgVirtualRestConfig['modules']['parsoid']" in my config. [[User:Source61|Source61]] ([[User talk:Source61|talk]]) 22:07, 18 February 2021 (UTC)

== How to hide the “Save your changes” confirmation window when saving a page on Mediawiki ==

I have a personal wiki running on mediawiki and don't think I really need to track the page edit summary or whatsoever, so is there anyway to skip it? which means when I am done with editing on a page and click on Save, it just Save the page without asking me to describe what I changed..

Thank you! [[User:Paulxu20|Paulxu20]] ([[User talk:Paulxu20|talk]]) 15:30, 21 February 2021 (UTC)

== Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server: http-bad-status after moving Wiki from Windows 10 to Raspbian Lite ==

I have had a private wiki running on my Windows 10 machine with Apache2 and MariaDB for quite a while and VisualEditor works fine, however today once I moved the wiki to my Raspberry Pi, also running Apache2 and MariaDB, VisualEditor will not load with the message box: <code>Error contacting the Parsoid/RESTBase server: http-bad-status</code>. I've read that private wikis can have issues with VisualEditor, '''however when I tried making the wiki public, the issue remained.''' I have nothing related to VisualEditor in my configuration file and the config file is identical to my other config file on Win10. The error comes up immediately when editing a page, or after pressing save if creating a new page. Does anyone have any ideas how I can fix this? If not I'll just use source editing instead.

Edit: This is my version table and installed extensions:
{| class="wikitable"
!Product
!Version
|-
|[https://www.mediawiki.org/ MediaWiki]
|1.35.1
|-
|[https://php.net/ PHP]
|7.3.27-1~deb10u1 (apache2handler)
|-
|[https://mariadb.org/ MariaDB]
|10.3.27-MariaDB-0+deb10u1
|-
|[http://www.lua.org/ Lua]
|5.1.5
|}
{| class="wikitable"
!Entry point
!URL
|-
|Article path
|<code>/index.php/$1</code>
|-
|Script path
|<code>/</code>
|-
|index.php
|<code>/index.php</code>
|-
|api.php
|<code>/api.php</code>
|-
|rest.php
|<code>/rest.php</code>
|}
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
! colspan="5" |Special pages
|-
!Extension
!Version
!Licence
!Description
!Authors
|-
|[[Extension:CiteThisPage|CiteThisPage]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/CiteThisPage GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Adds a [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:CiteThisPage citation] special page and toolbox link
|Ævar Arnfjörð Bjarmason and James D. Forrester
|-
|[[Extension:Interwiki|Interwiki]]
|3.2
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/Interwiki GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Adds a [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Interwiki special page] to view and edit the interwiki table
|Stephanie Amanda Stevens, Alexandre Emsenhuber, Robin Pepermans, Siebrand Mazeland, Platonides, Raimond Spekking, Sam Reed, Jack Phoenix, Calimonius the Estrange and others
|-
|[[Extension:Nuke|Nuke]]
|1.3.0
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/Nuke GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Gives administrators the ability to [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Nuke mass delete] pages
|Brion Vibber and Jeroen De Dauw
|-
|[[Extension:Renameuser|Renameuser]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/Renameuser GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Adds a [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:RenameUser special page] to rename a user (need ''renameuser'' right)
|Ævar Arnfjörð Bjarmason and Aaron Schulz
|-
|[[Extension:Replace Text|Replace Text]]
|1.4.1
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/Replace_Text GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Provides a [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:ReplaceText special page] to allow administrators to do a global string find-and-replace on all the content pages of a wiki
|Yaron Koren, Niklas Laxström and others
|-
| colspan="5" |
|-
! colspan="5" |Editors
|-
!Extension
!Version
!Licence
!Description
!Authors
|-
|[[Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/CodeEditor GPL-2.0-or-later AND BSD-3-Clause]
|Syntax-highlighted editing for JavaScript and CSS pages using [https://ace.c9.io/ Ace editor]
|Brion Vibber, Derk-Jan Hartman and [https://ace.c9.io/ authors of Ace]
|-
|[[Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|0.1.2 (4465cbe) 21:11, 5 February 2021
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/VisualEditor MIT]
|Visual editor for MediaWiki
|Alex Monk, Bartosz Dziewoński, C. Scott Ananian, Christian Williams, David Lynch, Ed Sanders, Inez Korczyński, James D. Forrester, Moriel Schottlender, Roan Kattouw, Rob Moen, Subramanya Sastry, Thalia Chan, Timo Tijhof, Trevor Parscal and [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/Credits/VisualEditor others]
|-
|[[Extension:WikiEditor|WikiEditor]]
|0.5.3
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/WikiEditor GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Provides an advanced, extensible wikitext editing interface
|Derk-Jan Hartman, Trevor Parscal, Roan Kattouw, Nimish Gautam and Adam Miller
|-
| colspan="5" |
|-
! colspan="5" |Parser hooks
|-
!Extension
!Version
!Licence
!Description
!Authors
|-
|[[Extension:CategoryTree|CategoryTree]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/CategoryTree GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Dynamically navigate the [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:CategoryTree category structure]
|Daniel Kinzler
|-
|[[Extension:Cite|Cite]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/Cite GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Adds <code><nowiki><ref></nowiki></code> and <code><nowiki><references></nowiki></code> tags for citations
|Ævar Arnfjörð Bjarmason, Andrew Garrett, Brion Vibber, Ed Sanders, Marius Hoch, Steve Sanbeg, Trevor Parscal and [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/Credits/Cite others]
|-
|[[Extension:ImageMap|ImageMap]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/ImageMap GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Allows client-side clickable image maps using <code><nowiki><imagemap></nowiki></code> tag
|Tim Starling
|-
|[[Extension:InputBox|InputBox]]
|0.3.0
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/InputBox MIT]
|Allow inclusion of predefined HTML forms
|Erik Moeller, Leonardo Pimenta, Rob Church, Trevor Parscal and DaSch
|-
|[[Extension:InteractiveTimeline|InteractiveTimeline]]
|1.6.0
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/InteractiveTimeline GPL-2.0+]
|Adds <itimeline>...<itimeline> tag to provide interactive timelines using the CHAP Timeline library
|Chris Page
|-
|[[Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions]]
|1.6.0
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/ParserFunctions GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Enhance parser with logical functions
|Tim Starling, Robert Rohde, Ross McClure and Juraj Simlovic
|-
|[[Extension:Poem|Poem]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/Poem CC0-1.0]
|Adds <code><nowiki><poem></nowiki></code> tag for poem formatting
|Nikola Smolenski, Brion Vibber and Steve Sanbeg
|-
|[[Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/Scribunto GPL-2.0-or-later AND MIT]
|Framework for embedding scripting languages into MediaWiki pages
|Victor Vasiliev, Tim Starling and Brad Jorsch
|-
|[[Extension:SyntaxHighlight|SyntaxHighlight]]
|2.0
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/SyntaxHighlight GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Provides syntax highlighting <code><nowiki><syntaxhighlight></nowiki></code> using [http://pygments.org/ Pygments - Python syntax highlighter]
|Brion Vibber, Tim Starling, Rob Church, Niklas Laxström, Ori Livneh and Ed Sanders
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|0.1.2
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/TemplateData GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Implement data storage for template parameters (using JSON)
|Timo Tijhof, Moriel Schottlender, James D. Forrester, Trevor Parscal, Bartosz Dziewoński, Marielle Volz and others
|-
| colspan="5" |
|-
! colspan="5" |Media handlers
|-
!Extension
!Version
!Licence
!Description
!Authors
|-
|[[Extension:PdfHandler|PDF Handler]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/PDF_Handler GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Handler for viewing PDF files in image mode
|Martin Seidel and Mike Połtyn
|-
|[[Extension:TimedMediaHandler|TimedMediaHandler]]
|0.6.0 (bd0d5e6) 21:36, 24 August 2020
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/TimedMediaHandler GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Handler for audio, video and timed text, with format support for WebM, Ogg Theora, Vorbis, srt
|Michael Dale, Jan Gerber, Derk-Jan Hartman, Brion Vibber, Tim Starling and others
|-
| colspan="5" |
|-
! colspan="5" |Spam prevention
|-
!Extension
!Version
!Licence
!Description
!Authors
|-
|[[Extension:ConfirmEdit|ConfirmEdit]]
|1.6.0
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/ConfirmEdit GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Provides CAPTCHA techniques to protect against spam and password-guessing
|Brion Vibber, Florian Schmidt, Sam Reed and [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/Credits/ConfirmEdit others]
|-
|[[Extension:SpamBlacklist|SpamBlacklist]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/SpamBlacklist GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Regex-based anti-spam tool allowing to blacklist URLs in pages and email addresses for registered users
|Tim Starling, John Du Hart and Daniel Kinzler
|-
|[[Extension:TitleBlacklist|TitleBlacklist]]
|1.5.0
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/TitleBlacklist GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Allows administrators to forbid creation of pages and user accounts per a [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/MediaWiki:Titleblacklist blacklist] and [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/MediaWiki:Titlewhitelist whitelist]
|Victor Vasiliev and Fran Rogers
|-
| colspan="5" |
|-
! colspan="5" |API
|-
!Extension
!Version
!Licence
!Description
!Authors
|-
|[[Extension:PageImages|PageImages]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/PageImages WTFPL]
|Collects information about images used on page
|Max Semenik
|-
| colspan="5" |
|-
! colspan="5" |Other
|-
!Extension
!Version
!Licence
!Description
!Authors
|-
|[[Extension:Gadgets|Gadgets]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/Gadgets GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Lets users select custom [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Gadgets CSS and JavaScript gadgets] in their [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets preferences]
|Daniel Kinzler and Max Semenik
|-
|[[Extension:LocalisationUpdate|LocalisationUpdate]]
|1.4.0
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/LocalisationUpdate GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Keeps the localised messages as up to date as possible
|Tom Maaswinkel, Niklas Laxström and Roan Kattouw
|-
|[[Extension:MobileFrontend|MobileFrontend]]
|2.3.0 (1421405) 22:43, 6 October 2020
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/MobileFrontend GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Mobile Frontend
|Patrick Reilly, Max Semenik, Jon Robson, Arthur Richards, Brion Vibber, Juliusz Gonera, Ryan Kaldari, Florian Schmidt, Rob Moen, Sam Smith and [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/Credits/MobileFrontend others]
|-
|[[Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/MultimediaViewer GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Expand thumbnails in a larger size in a fullscreen interface
|MarkTraceur (Mark Holmquist), Gilles Dubuc, Gergő Tisza, Aaron Arcos, Zeljko Filipin, Pau Giner, theopolisme, MatmaRex, apsdehal, vldandrew, Ebrahim Byagowi, Dereckson, Brion VIBBER, Yuki Shira, Yaroslav Melnychuk, tonythomas01, Raimond Spekking, Kunal Mehta, Jeff Hall, Christian Aistleitner, Amir E. Aharoni and [http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/Credits/MultimediaViewer others]
|-
|[[Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth]]
|0.4.4
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/OATHAuth GPL-2.0-or-later AND GPL-3.0-or-later]
|Provides authentication support using HMAC based one-time passwords
|Ryan Lane, Robert Vogel <vogel@hallowelt.com> and Dejan Savuljesku <savuljesku@hallowelt.com>
|-
|[[Extension:SecureLinkFixer|SecureLinkFixer]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/SecureLinkFixer GPL-3.0-or-later]
|Rewrites URLs to HTTPS if domain always requires HTTPS
|Kunal Mehta
|-
|[[Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts]]
|–
|[http://tollyhill.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Version/License/TextExtracts GPL-2.0-or-later]
|Provides plain-text or limited HTML extracts of page content
|Max Semenik
|} [[User:TollyH|TollyH]] ([[User talk:TollyH|talk]]) 12:40, 22 February 2021 (UTC)

== Visual Editor save content as parent.location="/login.htm ==

I have installed Mediawiki 1.35.1 on php 7.4, nginx 1.19. Loaded visual editor but when loads the page content is missing and when its saves the content it is giving

<html><head><meta HTTP-EQUIV="Pragma" CONTENT="no-cache"><script language='javascript'>parent.location="/login.htm"</script></head><body></body></html>

on every page.

==Installed software==
{| class="wikitable"
!Product
!Version
|-
|[https://www.mediawiki.org/ MediaWiki]
|1.35.1
|-
|[https://php.net/ PHP]
|7.4.15 (fpm-fcgi)
|-
|[https://mariadb.org/ MariaDB]
|10.4.17-MariaDB-1:10.4.17+maria~bionic
|-
|[http://site.icu-project.org/ ICU]
|65.1
|-
|[http://www.lua.org/ Lua]
|5.1.5
|}

==Entry point URLs==
{| class="wikitable"
!Entry point
!URL
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgArticlePath|Article path]]
|<code>[http://panchayatwiki.com/$1 /$1]</code>
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgScriptPath|Script path]]
|<code>[http://panchayatwiki.com/ /]</code>
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:index.php|index.php]]
|<code>[http://panchayatwiki.com/index.php /index.php]</code>
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:api.php|api.php]]
|<code>[http://panchayatwiki.com/api.php /api.php]</code>
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:rest.php|rest.php]]
|<code>[http://panchayatwiki.com/rest.php /rest.php]</code>
|}
I tried a lot of options with nginx configuration and LocalSettings.php but no luck. The wiki is panchayatwiki.com [[User:Ranjithsiji|Ranjithsiji]] ([[User talk:Ranjithsiji|talk]]) 03:48, 23 February 2021 (UTC)

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:20:16Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with "മൂന്ന് അടിക്കുറിപ്പ് സംവിധാനത്തിൽ ഒന്ന് നിങ്ങളുടെ വിക്കിയിൽ ഉപ..."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "പട്ടിക" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* "ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ലേബലുകളില്ലാത്ത പുറത്തേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ ഇതുപോലെ കാണപ്പെടും: [http://example.com]. <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> ഒരു കണ്ണി സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യുമ്പോൾ അതിനുചുറ്റും ഒരു നീല ചതുരം പ്രത്യക്ഷപ്പെടും

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|വർഗ്ഗം, ഫയലുകൾ മറ്റുള്ളവയിലേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ]] നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ചേ‍ർക്കാം.
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
=== ഏത് സംവിധാനമാണ് നിലവിലുള്ളതെന്ന് തീരുമാനിക്കുന്നു===
|-
|മൂന്ന് അടിക്കുറിപ്പ് സംവിധാനത്തിൽ ഒന്ന് നിങ്ങളുടെ വിക്കിയിൽ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നുണ്ടാവും <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/287/ml

2020-12-04T12:20:15Z

മൂന്ന് അടിക്കുറിപ്പ് സംവിധാനത്തിൽ ഒന്ന് നിങ്ങളുടെ വിക്കിയിൽ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നുണ്ടാവും

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:19:30Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with "=== ഏത് സംവിധാനമാണ് നിലവിലുള്ളതെന്ന് തീരുമാനിക്കുന്നു==="

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "പട്ടിക" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* "ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ലേബലുകളില്ലാത്ത പുറത്തേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ ഇതുപോലെ കാണപ്പെടും: [http://example.com]. <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> ഒരു കണ്ണി സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യുമ്പോൾ അതിനുചുറ്റും ഒരു നീല ചതുരം പ്രത്യക്ഷപ്പെടും

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|വർഗ്ഗം, ഫയലുകൾ മറ്റുള്ളവയിലേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ]] നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ചേ‍ർക്കാം.
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
=== ഏത് സംവിധാനമാണ് നിലവിലുള്ളതെന്ന് തീരുമാനിക്കുന്നു===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/422/ml

2020-12-04T12:19:29Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with "=== ഏത് സംവിധാനമാണ് നിലവിലുള്ളതെന്ന് തീരുമാനിക്കുന്നു==="

=== ഏത് സംവിധാനമാണ് നിലവിലുള്ളതെന്ന് തീരുമാനിക്കുന്നു===

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:18:59Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with "വർഗ്ഗം, ഫയലുകൾ മറ്റുള്ളവയിലേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ചേ..."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "പട്ടിക" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* "ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ലേബലുകളില്ലാത്ത പുറത്തേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ ഇതുപോലെ കാണപ്പെടും: [http://example.com]. <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> ഒരു കണ്ണി സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യുമ്പോൾ അതിനുചുറ്റും ഒരു നീല ചതുരം പ്രത്യക്ഷപ്പെടും

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|വർഗ്ഗം, ഫയലുകൾ മറ്റുള്ളവയിലേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ]] നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ചേ‍ർക്കാം.
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/433/ml

2020-12-04T12:18:59Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with "വർഗ്ഗം, ഫയലുകൾ മറ്റുള്ളവയിലേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ചേ..."

[[$Advanced|വർഗ്ഗം, ഫയലുകൾ മറ്റുള്ളവയിലേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ]] നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ചേ‍ർക്കാം.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:18:02Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with "ഒരു കണ്ണി സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യുമ്പോൾ അതിനുചുറ്റും ഒരു നീല ചതുരം പ്രത..."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "പട്ടിക" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* "ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ലേബലുകളില്ലാത്ത പുറത്തേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ ഇതുപോലെ കാണപ്പെടും: [http://example.com]. <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> ഒരു കണ്ണി സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യുമ്പോൾ അതിനുചുറ്റും ഒരു നീല ചതുരം പ്രത്യക്ഷപ്പെടും

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/298/ml

2020-12-04T12:18:01Z

ഒരു കണ്ണി സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യുമ്പോൾ അതിനുചുറ്റും ഒരു നീല ചതുരം പ്രത്യക്ഷപ്പെടും

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:17:23Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with "ലേബലുകളില്ലാത്ത പുറത്തേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ ഇതുപോലെ കാണപ്പെടും: [http://ex..."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "പട്ടിക" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* "ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ലേബലുകളില്ലാത്ത പുറത്തേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ ഇതുപോലെ കാണപ്പെടും: [http://example.com]. <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/243/ml

2020-12-04T12:17:20Z

ലേബലുകളില്ലാത്ത പുറത്തേക്കുള്ള കണ്ണികൾ ഇതുപോലെ കാണപ്പെടും: [http://example.com].

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:16:35Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു"

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "പട്ടിക" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* "ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/408/ml

2020-12-04T12:16:34Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു"

"ഗ്രാഫ്" ഒരു ഗ്രാഫ് ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:51Z

Ranjithsiji:

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "പട്ടിക" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/405/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:50Z

Ranjithsiji:

"പട്ടിക" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:33Z

Ranjithsiji:

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/257/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:31Z

Ranjithsiji:

"$italic" (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:27Z

Ranjithsiji:

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/258/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:25Z

Ranjithsiji:

"$superscript" (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:22Z

Ranjithsiji:

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/259/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:20Z

Ranjithsiji:

"$subscript" (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:15Z

Ranjithsiji:

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/260/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:15Z

Ranjithsiji:

"$strikethrough" (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:11Z

Ranjithsiji:

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" item (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/252/ml

2020-12-04T12:15:09Z

Ranjithsiji:

"$underline" (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:14:41Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""$media" (മലകളുടെ പടം) media dialog ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" item (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" item (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/263/ml

2020-12-04T12:14:38Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""$media" (മലകളുടെ പടം) media dialog ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു."

"$media" (മലകളുടെ പടം) [[$1|media dialog]] ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:11:40Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" item (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" item (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) opens the [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* "Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/406/ml

2020-12-04T12:11:39Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു."

"Code block" ഒരു കോഡ് ഭാഗം ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:11:17Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" item (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" item (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) opens the [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* "Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Code block" item allows you to insert code.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/405/ml

2020-12-04T12:11:16Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു."

"Table" ഒരു പട്ടിക ചേർക്കാൻ സഹായിക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:10:45Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""$underline" item (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" item (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" item (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) opens the [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Table" item allows you to insert a table.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Code block" item allows you to insert code.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/252/ml

2020-12-04T12:10:44Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""$underline" item (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു."

"$underline" item (<u>U</u>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തിന് ഒരു അടിവര ചേർക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:10:10Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""$strikethrough" item (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്..."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" item (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" item (<u>U</u>) adds a solid line beneath the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) opens the [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Table" item allows you to insert a table.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Code block" item allows you to insert code.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]

Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/260/ml

2020-12-04T12:10:09Z

"$strikethrough" item (<s>S</s>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത വാക്കിനുമുകളിലൂടെ ഒരു വര ചേർക്കുന്നു.

Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ml

2020-12-04T12:09:48Z

Ranjithsiji: Created page with ""$subscript" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന..."

<languages />
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">{{PD Help Page}}</div>
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
<div style="max-width:70em; margin:auto;">
<div style="display:table;margin:auto; padding: 2em; background: #EBF4FA; box-shadow: 7px 7px 5px #CCC; -moz-border-radius: 15px; border-radius: 15px; ">
<big>ലേഖനം തിരുത്താതെ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ ശ്രമിക്കുന്നെങ്കിൽ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ഇവിടെ ഒരു പേജുണ്ട്] ഇവിടെ സുഖമായി പരീക്ഷിക്കുക. </big> <small>ഈ താളിൽ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നതിന് നിങ്ങൾക്ക് ഒരു അക്കൗണ്ട് ആവശ്യമില്ല.</small></div>

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== കണ്ടു തിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യം തുറക്കുന്നതെങ്ങനെ? ==

{| cellpadding="20" style="clear: both"
|-
| വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് ഒരു പേജ് തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി താളിനു മുകളിലുള്ള "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ഞെക്കുക.

തിരുത്തുന്നതിനായി പേജ് തുറക്കുന്നതിന് അല്പസമയം എടുക്കും. താൾ വളരെ വലുതാണെങ്കിൽ കുറച്ചധികം സമയമെടുത്തേക്കാം.

"{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}" എന്ന ടാബിൽ ക്ലിക്ക് ചെയ്താൽ പഴയപടിയുണ്ടായിരുന്ന തിരുത്തൽ താളിലേക്ക് തിരിച്ചു പോകാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| ഓരോ വിഭാഗത്തിലെയും "{{int|editsection}}" എന്ന കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ പ്രവർത്തനയോഗ്യമാക്കാം.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== തുടങ്ങുക : വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ ==

<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=കണ്ടുതിരുത്തൽ സൗകര്യത്തിന്റെ ടൂൾബാ‍റിന്റെ സ്ക്രീൻഷോട്ട്]]</div>

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിച്ച് തിരുത്തുമ്പോൾ വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ടൂൾബാർ സ്ക്രീനിനു മുകളിൽ ദൃശ്യമാകും. ഇതിൽ ചില പരിചിതമായ ഐക്കണുകളാണുള്ളത്:
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| മാറ്റങ്ങൾ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''', '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' കഴിയും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Headings''' pull-down menu: allows you to change how the paragraph is formatted. To change the style of a paragraph, put your cursor in the paragraph and select an item in this menu (you don't have to highlight any text). Section titles are formatted "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}", and subsections are "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}", "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}", and so on.</span> ടെക്സ്റ്റ് ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റ് ചെയ്യുന്നതിന് "{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|
'''ഫോ‍ർമാറ്റിംഗ്:''' "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" എന്നിവ അമർത്തിയാൽ ഒരു.മെനു തുറന്നു വരും
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}" item ('''B''') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ടെക്സ്റ്റിനെ കടുപ്പിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}" item (''I'') സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്താക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sup>2</sup>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്തഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് ഉയർത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി മുകളിൽ കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}" item (x<sub>2</sub>) സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്ത ഭാഗത്തെ ചുറ്റുമുള്ള വാക്കുകളിൽ നിന്ന് താഴ്ത്തി ചെറുതാക്കി കാണിക്കുന്നു.
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}" item (<s>S</s>) adds a solid bar through the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}" item (a set of curly brackets: <code>{}</code>) changes the font of the selected text to a monospaced font, which sets it apart from surrounding (proportionally spaced) text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}" item (<u>U</u>) adds a solid line beneath the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}" item (文A) allows you to label the language (for example, Japanese) and direction (for example, right-to-left) of the selected text.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The final item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), called "{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}", removes all character formatting from the selected text, including links.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have not selected any text, then when you press the "<u>'''''A'''''</u>" to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Linking tool:''' The chain icon is the [[#Editing links|linking tool]]. Pressing on it (usually after selecting some text) opens the [[#Editing links|link dialog]].</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' The "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu is used to add inline citations (also called "footnotes" or "references"). All projects have access to basic reference formatting and the ability to reuse citations by using this menu. It also gives users quick access to local citation templates, if these are enabled on their wiki.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Instructions for adding local citation templates to the {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu at a specific wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ബട്ടൺ:''' <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the citoid service is enabled on your wiki, then you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.</span>

അവലംബ ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തന്നത്താനെ പൂരിപ്പിക്കാൻ സൈറ്റോയിഡ് എന്ന സർവ്വീസ് ശ്രമിക്കും.
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Lists and indentation:''' The first two items allow you to format text as either a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}" or a "{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}". The last two items allow you to decrease or increase the indentation level of list items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu may be different on some projects. Below is a list of '''all''' options that may appear.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) opens the [[#Editing images and other media files|media dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (a puzzle piece) allows you to [[#Editing templates|edit templates]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Table" item allows you to insert a table.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}" item (a speech balloon) allows you to insert comments that are not visible to readers; these comments can be seen only when in edit mode, where they are indicated by an exclamation mark icon. In edit mode, pressing on the exclamation mark icon allows you to edit or delete the comment.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}" icon (an [[:w:ankh|ankh]] symbol - ☥) allows you to enter the hieroglyphics inserter. (See below.)</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Code block" item allows you to insert code.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Musical notation" item allows you to insert a musical notation.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) allows you to insert a gallery to the page.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon (Σ) opens the [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formula inserter dialog]].</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "Graph" item allows you to insert a graph.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}" item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a "namespace"), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books) opens a dialog in which you can specify where references will be displayed to the reader. Usually this needs to be done only once on a page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 | <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">'''Special character insertion:''' The "{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}" (Ω) icon is next to the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. When pressed, it displays a dialog showing many special characters. By pressing on a specific character, you place it into the text. These special characters include some standard symbols, diacritics, and mathematical symbols.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(This list may be customized locally. See {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for instructions.)</span>
|}
<div style="margin: 0 -50px;">
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]</div>
{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''Edit notices''' button displays any notices for the page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''Switch editor'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an '''Options''' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Advanced settings''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' which shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
* '''Templates used''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The tabs of the Options dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.
</div> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the button '''View as right-to-left''' and the button '''Find and replace''' which opens a dialog where you can insert characters, terms or Regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor bi-directional switching square brackets icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The '''switch to source editing''' button is next to the '''{{int|publishchanges}}''' button. It allows you to switch to the wikitext editor.</span>
|}

== മാറ്റങ്ങൾ പ്രസിദ്ധീകരിക്കുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are finished editing, press the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button in the toolbar. If you have made no changes, the button will be disabled (grayed out).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the "{{int|vector-view-view}}" tab above the edit toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the blue "{{int|publishchanges}}" button opens a dialog. You can then enter a brief summary of your actions, mark your edit as minor, and/or add the page to your {{int|mywatchlist}}. The box for the summary is the equivalent of the {{int|summary}} field in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also review your changes using the "{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}" button to confirm that they will function as intended before saving your changes. This is similar to the "{{int|showdiff}}" button in the wikitext editor.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The "{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}" button returns you to the page you were editing. You can publish all of your changes later.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links}}
== കണ്ണികൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="20"
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Links can be added through the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon (links in a chain) in the toolbar, or by using the shortcut {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (or {{Key press|Command|K}} on a Mac).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you select (highlight) text and then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" button, that text will be used in creating the link. For a link that involves only one word, you can either select that word or just put the cursor within that word.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you use either the button or the shortcut, a dialog will open in which you may type the link.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The link tool will try to help with '''internal''' links by searching for likely matches.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you have entered or selected the link, you complete the linking process by pressing {{key press|Enter}} or by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button. Your link will immediately appear on the page, but as with other changes to the page, it will not be published until you publish the ''entire'' page.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To link to a web page on another website, the process is similar: Choose the "{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}" tab, and enter a URL in the box.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">External links without labels look like this: [http://example.com].</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add these by placing your cursor away from any word (e.g., after a space).</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Open the link tool by pressing on the button or pressing the shortcut keys.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Type the URL in the box, and press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button to insert the link.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To change or remove an existing link, press within the text for that link, then press the "{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}" icon that appears near it. The dialog will appear, for editing. You can also get to the dialog with the {{key press|Ctrl|K}} keyboard shortcut.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a link is selected, it appears as blue framed.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the link editing dialog, you can then change where the link goes. You can also remove the link entirely by pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" button in the upper right corner of the dialog.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also open the link's target in another window by pressing on the copy of the link in the dialog box. (You might want do this to check if an external link is valid.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)
</div>
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
*Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.
</div>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.</span> നിങ്ങൾക്ക് തുടക്കത്തിൽനിന്നുതന്നെ കണ്ണ ചേർക്കാവുന്നതാണ്
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To keep the link directly, you may press within that link label, use backspace and delete key without pressing it once more than necessary, and a narrow blue link area will remain there.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.</span>
* <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].</span>
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences}}
== അവലംബങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{{Further|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's Cite button]]</span>}}

{| cellpadding="15"
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Determining which system is in place ===
</div>
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu does not include any citation templates.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then everything you need to know about footnotes is on this page.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The second system has the same type of "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, then you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the third system, you again start by pressing the Cite button.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
=== Editing an existing reference ===
</div>
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the "Edit" button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}" icon, pressing "Edit" opens the Reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Many wikis use templates to format references. If a template is used in your reference, then when you move your pointer over the reference information, all the information in that field will be highlighted.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the "edit" button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing "Edit" will open the template mini-editor dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" at the bottom of the mini-editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== നിലവിലുള്ള അവലംബം പുനരുപയോഗം ചെയ്യുക ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To re-use an existing reference, place your cursor in the body of the text where you want to add a new reference (number) for that citation. Then press on the "Re-use reference" item from the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a "Re-use" tab, in a dialog, instead of a "Re-use" item on the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu.)
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} dialog, look at the list for the reference you want to reuse, and select it. If there are many references, you can use the search box (labeled "{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}") to list only those references that include certain text.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== പുതിയ അവലംബം ചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a citation using the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu, place your cursor where you want to add it in the text. Then select the appropriate citation type in the menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== "അടിസ്ഥാന" സൈറ്റേഷൻ ഉപയോഗിക്കുന്നു ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference editor, you can add your citation, including formatting.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make the reference belong to a given group, although normally this is left blank. (This option is used to display groups of references with the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" tool.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the Reference dialog, if you want to include a citation template, or any other template, in your new reference, press the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" toolbar menu within the Reference editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, look for the template you want to use, add it and edit it as you would any other template. (See the [[#Editing templates|Editing templates]] section, below, if you need more information about templates.)</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
After you are done editing your new template, press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to return to the Reference editor, and "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" again to return to the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If there isn't already a list of references on the page (for example, if you are adding the first reference for the page), you need to specify where the list of references, and their text, will be displayed to the reader.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Place the cursor where you want to display the references list (usually at the bottom of the page), open the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu and press the "{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}" icon (three books).
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you are using several groups of references, which is relatively rare, you can specify the group in this dialog. Only the references that belong to that group will be displayed on the page at the location where you are placing the group.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
The final step in the References list dialog is to press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Using standard cite templates</span> ====
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the "{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}" menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Pressing on a template icon such as "Cite book" will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}" option.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Press on "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" when you are done.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files}}
== ചിത്രങ്ങളും മറ്റ് മീഡിയ ഫയലുകളും തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon (a picture of mountains) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also set various parameters for the image in the "{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}" window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you are done, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}" icon that appears below the picture.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== ചിത്രങ്ങൾ അപ്ലോഡ് ചെയ്യുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press the "Upload" tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== മീഡിയ ഗാലറികൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ===

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new gallery, press the "{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}" icon (a set of photos) on the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (<code><nowiki>|</nowiki></code>) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}" button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

=== തുടങ്ങുന്നു ===
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new template to a page, place your cursor where you want the template to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece) in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Start typing the name of the template you want to insert. When you see it on the list, press on its name. Then press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 4|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also edit a template that is already on the page. When you press on the template to select it, it turns blue, and a box appears with an "{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}" icon (puzzle piece). Then press on the "{{int|vector-view-edit}}" link.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In the visual editor, such hidden templates are shown as puzzle icons.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|70px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you select the icon, the context menu is displayed, and you can edit the template.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template not visible context menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റ് പരാമീറ്ററുകൾ ===
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you add a new template or open an existing one, the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-title}}" dialog is shown. The contents depends upon whether the template has been documented using the {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} system or not.</span>
|
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The template shown here has no TemplateData set up for it.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The dialog therefore provides a link to documentation for the template.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">By visiting the documentation you should be able to figure out if the template has any parameters (fields), and what goes in each field. Use numbers as the name for each nameless parameter.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The first un-named parameter is named <code>1</code>, the second is named <code>2</code>, and so forth.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with no TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If a template has been updated to contain [[VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData#What is TemplateData?|TemplateData]] information, then the dialog will show a list of individual (named) parameters.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor template with TemplateData|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">For an existing template, you can edit the parameters shown in the dialog, and you can add parameters by pressing "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param}}", at the very bottom of the dialog.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When a template embeds other templates, these sub-templates will appear inside the parameters that display them. They can be edited or removed inside the parameter field.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">New sub-templates are added by following the steps for adding a parameter. You may need to check the template documentation to make sure that the sub-template is supported.</span>
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Nested templates can currently be edited as wikitext only, without the facility offered by VisualEditor (see [[phab:T52182]]).</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== അവസാനിപ്പിക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">When you have finished editing a template, press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" to close the dialog and return to editing the main page.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== ടെംപ്ലേറ്റുകൾ മാറ്റിചേർക്കുന്നു ===
|-
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When a template must be [[:w:en:Help:Substitution|substituted]], type <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> (colon included) before the template's name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Autocompletion doesn't work with <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code>. If you want to use autocompletion, first find the template you are looking for, and then add <code><nowiki>subst:</nowiki></code> in front of the template name.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Then, press the blue "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-template}}" button.
</div>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Add any parameters as usual and press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You will see the template expand on the page after you press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}".</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Template editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

== ലിസ്റ്റുകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==
{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
[[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation; use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Here is the result of increased indentation.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.</span>
|}

== പട്ടികകൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| പട്ടികകൾ ചേർക്കാനും തിരുത്താനും വിഷ്വൽ എഡിറ്റർ ഉപയോഗിക്കാം.

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
When you press on "Table", in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Now the "Table" menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|ഒരു സെൽ സെലക്റ്റ് ചെയ്യാനായി ഒന്നുകൂടി ഞെക്കുക.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.
</div>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add, move or delete a column or a row.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on "Merge cells".</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also split cells that were previously merged. All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== വർഗ്ഗങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit categories, on the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, press the "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" item.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on "{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}" opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
For example, the default sorting key for the article "George Washington" is "Washington, George". In the category "Presidents of the United States", the article is listed under the letter "W", not the letter "G".
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}". As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the "{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}" icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== താളിന്റെ സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുന്നു ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit a page's settings, press to open the "{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}" menu, in the toolbar, and select the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">The "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}" button opens a dialog that shows several options.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}" checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.
</div>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.
</div>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}", which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.</span>
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Press "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}" when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.</span>
|}

== ഭൂപടം തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.</span>
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== കണക്കിലെ ഫോർമുലകൾ തിരുത്തുക ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the "{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}" icon ("Σ") in the "{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}" menu on the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the "{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}" button.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the "Σ" icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.</span>
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== സംഗീത സൂചകങ്ങൾ തിരുത്തുക ==
{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Then, from the "Insert" menu on the toolbar, press the "Musical notation" option.</span>

<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
</div>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">This will open the "Musical notation" dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.</span> <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Once you are finished, press the "Done" button to close the dialog and publish your changes.</span>
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Editing poems and other special items</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
| <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.</span>

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.</span>

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|}

== <span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Switching between the visual and wikitext editors</span> ==

{| cellpadding="15"
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the <code>[[ ]]</code> button on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<div lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">
You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on "Discard changes", you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)
</div>

താഴേക്ക് സ്ക്രോൾ ചെയ്യുക. അവിടെ വിക്കിടെക്സ്റ്റ് തിരുത്തുവാനുള്ള സ്ഥലം കാണാം
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | <hr />
|-
|
<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.</span>
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== കീബോർഡ് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ടുകൾ ==

<span lang="en" dir="ltr" class="mw-content-ltr">Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:</span>

{| style="text-align:center; margin:auto;" cellpadding="15"
|-
! പിസി ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
! പ്രവൃത്തി
! മാക്ക് ഷോർട്ട്കട്ട്
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| കടുപ്പിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ചെരിച്ചെഴുത്ത്
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| കണ്ണി ചേർക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| മുറിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| പകർത്തുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ഒട്ടിക്കുക
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | <hr />
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| അൺഡു
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}

</div>

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]